CNC SYSTEM

OSP-P200L
MACTURN/MULTUS Series
OPERATION MANUAL
(1st Edition)
Pub No. 5262-E (LE32-114-R1) Jan. 2006
 5262-E P-(i)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself from
hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safety
devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure accident-
free operation.
This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards which
Okuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.

1. Precautions Relating to Machine Installation

(1) Install the machine at a site where the following conditions (the conditions for achievement of
the guaranteed accuracy) apply.

• Ambient temperature: 17 to 25°C

• Ambient humidity: 40% to 75% at 20°C (no condensation)

• Site not subject to direct sunlight or excessive vibration; environment as free of dust, acid,
corrosive gases, and salt spray as possible.

(2) Prepare a primary power supply that complies with the following requirements.

• Voltage: 200 V

• Voltage fluctuation: ±10% max.

• Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz

• Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major
noise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this
could cause malfuntion of the CNC unit.

• If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is
no choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large
amount of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine).

(3) Installation Environment

Observe the following points when installing the control enclosure.

• Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.

• Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.

• Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessive
vibrations or shock.

• The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 0 to 40°C.

• The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is 30 to 95% (no conden-
sation).

• The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).
 5262-E P-(ii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

(1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent the entry of water,
chips, and dust.

(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there
are no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.

(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL
ON switch on the operation panel.

3. Precautions Relating to Manual/Continuous Operation

(1) Follow the instruction manual during operation.

(2) Do not operate the machine with the front cover, chuck cover, or another protective cover
removed.

(3) Close the front cover before starting the machine.

(4) When machining the initial workpiece, check for machine operations, run the machine under no
load to check for interference among components, cut the workpiece in the single block mode,
and then start continuous operation.

(5) Ensure your safety before rotating the spindle or moving a machine part.

(6) Do not touch chips or workpiece while the spindle is rotating.

(7) Do not stop a rotating part with hand or another means.

(8) Check that the condition of hydraulic chuck jaws as mounted, operating pressure, and maxi-
mum permissible revolving speed.

(9) Check the condition and location of the cutting tool as mounted.

(10) Check the tool offset value.

(11) Check the zero offset value.

(12) Check that the SPINDLE OVERRIDE and FEEDRATE OVERRIDE dials on the NC operation
panel are set to 100%.

(13) When moving the turret, check the software limits for X- and Z-axes or the locations of limit
switch dogs to prevent interference with the chuck and tailstock.

(14) Check the location of the turret.

(15) Check the location of the tailstock.

(16) Cut workpieces with a transmitted power and torque within the permissible range.

(17) Chuck each workpiece firmly.

(18) Check that the coolant nozzle is properly located.

 5262-E P-(iii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4. On Finishing Work
(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.

(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.

(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.

(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the
main power disconnect switch.

5. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

Trouble Occurs
In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe the
following points when performing maitenance inspections or during checking when trouble has
occurred.

(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the
machine.

(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need
to be taken.

(3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.

(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.

(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.

(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were
and secure them properly with their screws, etc.

(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage
checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.

(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box.

(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current
leakage and electric shocks.

(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure

a. Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.

b. Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge in
the MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are permitted
to perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.

• MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)

The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.
 5262-E P-(iv)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

c. The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board
whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that the
contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory
is supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are han-
dled, the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service per-
sonnel should handle these boards.

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure

a. Cleaning the cooling unit

The cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive tempera-
ture rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit. Inspect the
following points every three months.

• Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?

The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.

• Is the external air inlet blocked?

If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.

6. General Precautions
(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.

(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient
training.

(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine opera-
tors must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles.

(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct pro-
cedure before operating the machine.

(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any
time and from any position.

(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain high-
voltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.

(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
 5262-E P-(v)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

7. Symbols Used in Manual

The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of particu-
lar importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.

DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.

WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or seri-
ous injury.

CAUTION
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moder-
ate injury.

CAUTION
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to your
property.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
indicates general instructions for safe operation.
 5262-E P-(i)
INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Thank you very much for choosing our CNC system. This numerical control system is a expandable CNC
with various features . Major features of the CNC system are described below.

(1) Compact and highly reliable

The CNC system has become compact and highly reliable because of advanced hardware technology,
including computer boards equipped with high-speed micro processors, I/O link, and servo link. The
‘variable software’ as a technical philosophy of the OSPs supported by a hard disk. Functions may be
added to the CNC system as required after delivery.

(2) NC operation panels

The following types of NC operation panels are offered to improve the user-friendliness.

• Thin color operation panels (horizontal)

• Thin color operation panels (vertical)

One or more of the above types may not be used for some models.

(3) Machining management functions

These functions contribute to the efficient operation of the CNC system and improve the profitability from
small quantity production of multiple items and variable quantity production of variations. Major control
functions are described below.

a. Reduction of setup time

With increase in small-volume production, machining data setting is more frequently needed. The
simplified file operation facilitates such troublesome operation. The documents necessary for setup,
such as work instructions, are displayed on the CNC system to eliminate the necessity of controlling
drawings and further reduce the setup time.

b. Production Status Monitor

The progress and operation status can be checked on a real-time basis on the screen of the CNC
system.

c. Reduction of troubleshooting time

Correct information is quickly available for troubleshooting.

(4) Help functions

When an alarm is raised, press the help key to view the content of the alarm.
This helps take quick action against the alarm.

To operate the CNC system to its maximum performance, thoroughly read and understand this instruction
manual before use.
Keep this instruction manual at hand so that it will be available when you need a help.

Screens

Different screens are used for different models. Therefore, the

screens used on your CNC system may differ from those shown
in this manual.
 5262-E P-(i)
CONTENTS

CONTENTS

SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

SECTION 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS

SECTION 7 APPENDIX
 5262-E P-(i)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION.............................................................................1
1. Overview.................................................................................................................................. 1
2. Turret Indexing Control ............................................................................................................ 2
2-1. Turret Index Position ........................................................................................................ 2
2-2. Turret Number Assignment .............................................................................................. 3
2-3. Turret Indexing Turret Control .......................................................................................... 4
3. Turret B-axis Positioning Control ............................................................................................. 5
3-1. B-axis Positioning ............................................................................................................. 5
3-2. Movable Range of the B-axis ........................................................................................... 5
3-3. Precautions for B-axis positioning control ........................................................................ 6
4. Turret Indexing Commands ..................................................................................................... 7
4-1. Command Systems .......................................................................................................... 7
4-2. Base cutting Position Indexing by Tool Numbers ............................................................. 7
4-3. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Tool Numbers ........................................................ 7
4-4. Base cutting Position Indexing by Tool Group Numbers .................................................. 8
4-5. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Tool Group Numbers ............................................. 8
4-6. Base cutting Position Indexing by Turret Numbers .......................................................... 8
4-7. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Turret Numbers ...................................................... 9
4-8. ATC Position Indexing by Turret Numbers ....................................................................... 9
4-9. Independent Direction of the Tool Compensation Number, the Nose R Com-
pensation Number, and the Tool Diameter Compensation Number................................. 9
5. Turret B-axis Positioning Commands .................................................................................... 10
5-1. Command Systems ........................................................................................................ 10
5-2. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TL Command .......................... 11
5-3. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TG Command ......................... 11
5-4. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the T Command ............................ 12
5-5. Independent Command for Positioning B-axis ............................................................... 12
5-6. Turret Rotary Position Offset Command in B-axis Positioning (G52) ............................. 13
5-7. Terms Relevant to Turret Rotary Position Compensation .............................................. 14
6. Manual Turret Indexing Operation ......................................................................................... 15
6-1. Turret Indexing Position.................................................................................................. 15
6-2. H1 Turret ........................................................................................................................ 15
7. Manual B-axis Positioning Operation..................................................................................... 16
7-1. Positioning the B-axis ..................................................................................................... 16
7-2. Canceling B-axis positioning .......................................................................................... 16
7-3. BA Angle Data Display ................................................................................................... 17
8. Manual Slant Feed Function.................................................................................................. 18
8-1. Designating a Slant Feed Direction ................................................................................ 18
8-2. Selecting Slant Feed, Feed Operation ........................................................................... 19
8-3. Caution on Recovering from Manual Intervention .......................................................... 20
8-4. Relationship with the Slant Compound Fixed Cycle Function ........................................ 20
 5262-E P-(ii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

8-5. Others............................................................................................................................. 20
9. Tool Index Function ............................................................................................................... 21
9-1. Relation between Turret Indexing and Tool Indexing ..................................................... 21
9-2. Relation between Tool Indexing and Graphic Display .................................................... 21
9-3. Relation between Tool Index Command and Tool Compensation ................................. 22
9-4. Tool Index Commands ................................................................................................... 22
9-5. Relation between Rotary Tool and Tool Index Commands ............................................ 22
10.Parameter Settings ................................................................................................................ 23
10-1.B-axis User Parameters ................................................................................................ 23
10-2.B-axis System Parameters ............................................................................................ 23
10-3.Turret Position Error Compensation .............................................................................. 23
10-4.B-axis Indexing Angles .................................................................................................. 23
10-5.M-axis Orientation ......................................................................................................... 24
10-6.System Parameters ....................................................................................................... 24
10-7.Optional Parameters...................................................................................................... 25
10-8.Machine System Parameters ........................................................................................ 25
11.Tool Data Setting ................................................................................................................... 26
11-1.Tool Shape Data............................................................................................................ 26
11-2.Tool Compensation ....................................................................................................... 27
11-3.Tool Life Management (Special Function)..................................................................... 28
12.Tool Compensation Multi-System Function ........................................................................... 29
12-1.Combinations of Compensation Systems...................................................................... 29
12-2.Tool Compensation Data Structure ............................................................................... 30
12-3.Selecting the TOOL COMPENSATION Screen with the Tool Compensation
Multi-system Function..................................................................................................... 32
12-4.Tool Life Management Tool Information Screen for the Tool Compensation
Multi-system Function..................................................................................................... 32
12-5.System Variables........................................................................................................... 33
13.Other Functions ..................................................................................................................... 34
13-1.Tool Compensation Automatic Calculation Function..................................................... 34
13-2.Turret Coolant Interlock ................................................................................................. 34
13-3.Data Input/Output Function ........................................................................................... 35
13-4.Interlock ......................................................................................................................... 37

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION ..................................................................................38

1. Overview................................................................................................................................ 38
2. Machine Specifications .......................................................................................................... 38
2-1. Outline of the Machine.................................................................................................... 38
2-2. Machine Operation ......................................................................................................... 41
2-3. ATC Operation................................................................................................................ 42
3. ATC Logic Tables .................................................................................................................. 44
3-1. Input Logic Tables .......................................................................................................... 44
3-2. Output Logic Tables ....................................................................................................... 45
3-3. Manual Interlock Tables ................................................................................................. 45
 5262-E P-(iii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

4. Manual Operation .................................................................................................................. 46

4-1. Manual Magazine Operation .......................................................................................... 46
4-2. Manual ATC Operation ................................................................................................... 55
5. ATC Program Commands ..................................................................................................... 59
5-1. ATC Commands ............................................................................................................. 59
5-2. ATC Macro Commands .................................................................................................. 61
5-3. Others............................................................................................................................. 62
5-4. Example Programs ......................................................................................................... 63
6. Automatic Operation .............................................................................................................. 67
6-1. Sequence Return Procedure .......................................................................................... 67
6-2. Cautions on Using the Program Check/Graphic Scale Automatic Setting Func-
tion while in Machine Lock Status .................................................................................. 69
7. Data Setting ........................................................................................................................... 71
7-1. Magazine Information ..................................................................................................... 71
7-2. Tool Information.............................................................................................................. 74
8. ATC Status Display................................................................................................................ 75
8-1. ATC Status Display Screen ............................................................................................ 75
8-2. Tool Data Display Screen ............................................................................................... 77
8-3. Machine Diagnosis Screen ............................................................................................. 78
8-4. ATC Input/Output Display Screen .................................................................................. 81
9. Parameter Setting.................................................................................................................. 82
9-1. ATC Tool Change Position and Movable Range ............................................................ 82
9-2. Magazine Axis Parameter .............................................................................................. 83
9-3. EC–axis (Tool Change Arm Rotation Axis) Parameter................................................... 84
9-4. EZ–axis (Tool Change Advance/Retraction Rotation Axis) Parameter (MUL-
TUS-B300/B400) ............................................................................................................ 84
9-5. Positioning Point EC (MULTUS-B300/B400).................................................................. 85
9-6. Positioning Point EZ (MULTUS-B300/B400) .................................................................. 85
9-7. Turret Index Angle .......................................................................................................... 85
9-8. Magazine Panel Communication Parameter .................................................................. 86
9-9. Setting the Tool Change Arm Rotation Positions Immediately after Installing
the Control Software (MULTUS-B300/B400).................................................................. 87
9-10.Cam Shaft Timing Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-1) .......................... 88
9-11.Step Division Parameter................................................................................................ 89
9-12.ATC Tool Change Arm (Machine System Parameter No.18-2)..................................... 90
9-13.Tool Change Arm Torque Limit Parameter (Machine System Parameter
No.18-3).......................................................................................................................... 90
9-14.Tool Change Arm Override 1 (Machine System Parameter No.18-4) ........................... 90
9-15.Tool Change Arm Override 2, 3 (Machine System Parameter No.18-5, 6) ................... 91
10.System Check........................................................................................................................ 92
10-1.System Check Mode Parameters.................................................................................. 92
10-2.ATC Parameters............................................................................................................ 94
10-3.Manual ATC Operation.................................................................................................. 97
11.Others .................................................................................................................................. 100
11-1.G and M Code Macro Functions.................................................................................. 100
 5262-E P-(iv)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

11-2.ATC Macro Command Subprograms .......................................................................... 102

11-3.Optical In–process Workpiece Gauging Specification (Optional Specification)
.............. 108
11-4.At the Occurrence of ATC Failure ............................................................................... 109

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL ...............................................................................112

1. OUTLINE Y-AXIS CONTROL.............................................................................................. 112
1-1. OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 112
2. OPERATION........................................................................................................................ 113
2-1. MACHINE OPERATION ............................................................................................... 113
2-2. MANUAL OPERATION ................................................................................................ 116
2-3. MDI OPERATION ......................................................................................................... 118
2-4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION .......................................................................................... 118
2-5. NC OPERATION PANEL DISPLAY ............................................................................. 119
2-6. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS .......................................................................................... 121
3. PROGRAMMING................................................................................................................. 130
3-1. OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 130
3-2. Y-AXIS CONTROL COMMANDS ................................................................................. 130
3-3. Y-AXIS COMPOUND FIXED CYCLES ........................................................................ 134
4. Slant Machining Mode Function .......................................................................................... 145
4-1. Overview....................................................................................................................... 145
4-2. Coordinate System for Slant Machining ....................................................................... 146
4-3. Slant Machining Mode Commands............................................................................... 148
4-4. Functions Usable in Slant Machining Mode ................................................................. 149
4-5. Zero Point Shift Macro Command ................................................................................ 152
4-6. Actual Position Display ................................................................................................. 153
5. DATA OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 154
5-1. DATA OPERATION ...................................................................................................... 154
6. PARAMETER ...................................................................................................................... 161
6-1. PARAMETER ............................................................................................................... 161
7. APPENDIX........................................................................................................................... 165
7-1. Y-AXIS MACHINING EXAMPLES (FOR A-TURRET SIDE ONLY).............................. 165

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION ...............................................................169

1. Overview.............................................................................................................................. 169
1-1. Overview....................................................................................................................... 169
1-2. Machine Configuration.................................................................................................. 169
1-3. Coordinate System ....................................................................................................... 170
2. Operation Panels ................................................................................................................. 171
2-1. Basic Configuration of Operation Panels...................................................................... 171
2-2. Option Panel for Sub-spindle Machines ....................................................................... 172
2-3. Brief Explanation of the Panels .................................................................................... 173
3. Manual Operation ................................................................................................................ 175
3-1. Operations Related to the Spindle 1 (Main Spindle) .................................................... 175
 5262-E P-(v)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3-2. Operations Related to the Spindle 2 (Sub Spindle) ...................................................... 177

3-3. Axis Feed Operation (X–, Z–, C–, and W–axis) ........................................................... 179
3-4. M-TOOL SPINDLE OPERATION ................................................................................. 182
3-5. Other Manual Operations ............................................................................................. 184
4. MDI/Automatic Operation .................................................................................................... 185
4-1. Coordinate System Selection ....................................................................................... 185
4-2. MDI Operation .............................................................................................................. 186
4-3. Automatic Operation ..................................................................................................... 186
5. Additional Functions ............................................................................................................ 187
5-1. Workpiece Transfer Function from the Main Spindle to the Sub Spindle ..................... 187
5-2. Z–axis Mirror Image...................................................................................................... 188
5-3. Interlock (for two-saddle models only) .......................................................................... 192
5-4. W-axis Cutting Function (Optional)............................................................................... 193
6. Programming ....................................................................................................................... 195
6-1. Coordinate System ....................................................................................................... 195
6-2. Program Commands .................................................................................................... 197
7. Data Operation .................................................................................................................... 199
7-1. Zero Setting .................................................................................................................. 199
8. Description of Parameters ................................................................................................... 203
8-1. System Parameters ...................................................................................................... 203
8-2. User Parameters .......................................................................................................... 204
8-3. Chuck Parameters ........................................................................................................ 205
8-4. Machine System Parameter (Airblow/Coolant)............................................................. 207
8-5. Machine User Parameter (Airblow/Coolant) ................................................................. 210
8-6. Machine User Parameter (Chuck) ................................................................................ 211
8-7. Machine User Parameter (Spindle) .............................................................................. 212
8-8. Machine System Parameter (Spindle) .......................................................................... 213
8-9. Machine System Parameter (Door Interlock) ............................................................... 214
8-10.Machine System Parameter (Milling Spindle).............................................................. 215

SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400) ..............................................216

1. Operation ............................................................................................................................. 217
1-1. Setup Operation ........................................................................................................... 217
1-2. Ordinary Operation ....................................................................................................... 217
2. Tailstock Movement............................................................................................................. 218
2-1. Manual Tailstock Movement ......................................................................................... 218
2-2. Automatic Tailstock Movement..................................................................................... 218
3. Switching between High/Low Pressure ............................................................................... 219
3-1. Switching between High/Low Pressure Command....................................................... 219
3-2. Operation ...................................................................................................................... 219
4. Multiple Sizing Position Command ...................................................................................... 220
4-1. Multiple Sizing Position Command ............................................................................... 220
4-2. Operation ...................................................................................................................... 220
4-3. Sequence Restoration (operation starting from the halfway of the program) ............... 220
 5262-E P-(vi)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5. Preparatory Operation ......................................................................................................... 221

5-1. Setting the Sizing Position ............................................................................................ 221
5-2. No-load Torque Measurement...................................................................................... 222
6. Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 223
6-1. NC Tailstock User Parameter ....................................................................................... 223
6-2. NC Tailstock System Parameter .................................................................................. 227
7. Interlock ............................................................................................................................... 229

SECTION 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS...........................................................................231

1. Description of Other Functions ............................................................................................ 231
1-1. Override for Internal Arc Cutting ................................................................................... 231
1-2. Helical Cutting Function (Optional) ............................................................................... 233

SECTION 7 APPENDIX ...........................................................................................234

1. Logic Tables ........................................................................................................................ 234
2. ATC Input/Output Bit Tables................................................................................................ 257
3. List of Data Formats ............................................................................................................ 271
3-1. Tool data setting (T) ..................................................................................................... 271
3-2. Zero point data setting (0) ............................................................................................ 272
3-3. Parameter setting (P) ................................................................................................... 273
 5262-E P-1
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

1. Overview
This section describes the functions and operations of the turrets installed in MACTURN and MUL-
TUS series.
MACTURN and MULTUS series can move its saddle in three directions X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis.
The turret rotates around the Y-axis.
The turret indexing function is available in two modes: “B-axis 1° indexing” by 1°, and “B-axis 1/
1000° indexing” by 0.001°. However, only “B-axis 1/1000° indexing” is available in MULTUS series.

B-axis indexing type

1° indexing 1/1000° indexing
MACTURN 250/350/550 Available Available
MULTUS B300/B400 Not available Available
 5262-E P-2
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

2. Turret Indexing Control

Since the turret of MACTURN and MULTUS series rotates around the Y-axis, a single tool can be
used on the front or on a side according to the direction the turret is indexed.

2-1. Turret Index Position

(1) Base cutting position
One of the basic indexing operations of the turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machines
is “base cutting position” indexing. The base cutting position means the state the tool attached
faces the Z-axis direction. When a second spindle is equipped, the turret indexing position is
180 degrees shifted from the base cutting position.

(2) Vertical cutting position

The “vertical cutting position” is the state the B-axis is shifted 90 degrees from the base cutting
position in the positive direction. In this position, the tool attached faces the X-axis direction.

(3) ATC position

MACTURN and MULTUS series are generally equipped with an ATC. To mount a tool to the tur-
ret using an ATC, the saddle must be moved to the position where the tool can be replaced, and
the turret must be indexed to the ATC position in advance. On MACTURN and MULTUS series
machines, the ATC position and the turret indexing angle to the base cutting position are the
same.
Although physical turret indexing is the same, the control mode may be different.

• H1 turret

First spindle
base cutting
position

Second spindle
base cutting
position

Vertical cutting position

LE32114R0100300030001
 5262-E P-3
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

2-2. Turret Number Assignment

A general turret, for example an octagonal turret, is indexed with index numbers 1 to 8. The turret for
MACTURN and MULTUS series machines, on the other hand, can use a single tool in two different
indexing positions, which means both the H1 turrets are internally controlled as square turrets in the
NC.
With a regular turret indexing command (such as T0100 and T0300), the turret number NC has
internally assigned will be indexed to the base cutting position.

H1 turret numbers
Although only one tool can be attached to the H1 turret, turret numbers 1 to 3 are assigned to it. The
turret can, therefore, be indexed as shown below with a T command, but to which direction the tool
will be faced will generally be directed.

T1 T3
T2

LE32114R0100300040001
 5262-E P-4
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

2-3. Turret Indexing Turret Control

The H1 turret cannot make a full turn because of the structure of the turret, and moves like a turret
within a specific range as shown below.
In a machine with a turret indexing single-direction positioning function (*) for turret control, an error
will occur if an overshoot in a single direction is in the turret indexing prohibition range.
* Such a machine positions the B-axis from the B-axis negative direction to the positive direction,
irrespective of the position of the target point. With a command of positioning to a smaller angle
than the current one, the B-axis will move to -10 degrees and then in the positive direction to
the target point.

H1 turret
The MACTURN series can rotate the H1 turret between -15° and +195° and MULTUS series
machine can rotate between -30° and +195° with the base cutting position set at 0°.
It will be indexed in the order of T1 → T2 → T3 → T2 → T1 → T2 ... with the manual turret swing
button.

LE32114R0100300050001

LE32114R0100300050002
 5262-E P-5
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

3. Turret B-axis Positioning Control

When “B-axis one-degree indexing mode” or “B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing mode” is
selected, the B-axis can be positioned to any set angle. This B-axis positioning control function is
available for machining inclined faces.

3-1. B-axis Positioning

The B-axis can be positioned with only an MDI command or program command. To perform manual
operation with the B-axis positioned, the B-axis must be positioned in advance by MDI operation.
For specific B-axis positioning commands, see 5. “Turret B-axis Positioning Commands”.

3-2. Movable Range of the B-axis

In B-axis positioning, the angular reference for the B-axis angle command is different depending on
the turret Indexed state. Basically, the increment in the B-axis angle from the turret indexing position
as the reference is directed.
Depending on the turret indexing position, an error will occur if he B-axis positioning angle is out of
the movable range.
Set the movable range with the mechanical system parameters “turret boundary angle” and “turret
angle range.”

H1 turret
Assuming that the indexed angle of the B-axis with T1 as the base cutting position is 0.000°, the B-
axis positioning command range for MACTURN series is between -30° and +195° and MULTUS
series is -30° and +195°.

LE32114R0100300080001

LE32114R0100300080002
 5262-E P-6
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

3-3. Precautions for B-axis positioning control

(1) The B-axis positioning data just after software installation is 0 degrees.

(2) Issue a B-axis angle data command in the “BA=” format.

(3) A B-axis positioning command must be set in the same block as a turret indexing command.

(4) “BA = 0” will be considered directed when only a turret indexing command is issued.

(5) After the operation mode is switched from automatic or MFI operation to manual operation, the
angle data for the B-axis positioning command remains valid. The B-axis angle data is backed
up in real time and will be retained even after the power is turned OFF.

(6) The B-axis positioning angle data is displayed as current position data. However, if there is a
difference of more than 0.5 degrees between the directed B-axis position and the angle of the
B-axis actually positioned, the current position will be displayed as “‘.‘‘‘” In this case, the
current position will be displayed in the normal manner by swinging the turret again.

(7) The direction of the B-axis coordinates generally depends on the direction of the Y-axis coordi-
nates. MACTURN and MULTUS series machines, however, always treat the counterclockwise
direction as the B-axis positive direction. This direction will not be affected by Y-axis mirror
images that will be described later. On machines equipped with a sub-spindle, the clockwise
direction viewed from the turret is the B-axis positive direction when the coordinate system for
the second spindle mode is selected.
 5262-E P-7
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

4. Turret Indexing Commands

A wide variety of directing methods are available for turret indexing according to the purpose.
First understand the outline of the command systems, and see details of the directing methods.

4-1. Command Systems

Base cutting posi-

Com- tion indexing
Purpose Remarks
mand Vertical cutting
position indexing
Directing turret indexing with the tool TL=rr t t oo BT=0
TL The BT command must exist
number as an argument. TL=rr t t oo BT=1
in the same block as the TL
Directing turret indexing with the tool TG=gg BT=0 or TG command.
TG
group number as an argument. TG=gg BT=1
Trr t t oo TP=0 The TP command must exist
Directing turret indexing with the tur-
T in the same block as the T
ret number as an argument. Trr t t oo TP=1 command.
Indexing the turret to the ATC posi-
TC tion with the turret number as an TC=nn
argument.

rr: Nose R compensation number

tt: Tool number
oo: Tool compensation number
nn: Turret number

4-2. Base cutting Position Indexing by Tool Numbers

TL = r r t t oo BT = 0
TL = t t tooo BT = 0Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the number specified in [tt] to the base cutting position.

• Commands for BT = 0 can be omitted.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool number in [ttt] and a tool compensation
number in [ooo]. The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the
nose R compensation number.

4-3. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Tool Numbers

TL = r r t t oo BT = 1
TL = t t tooo BT = 1Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the number specified in [ttt] to the vertical cutting position.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool number in [ttt] and a tool compensation
number in [ooo]. The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the
nose R compensation number.
 5262-E P-8
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

4-4. Base cutting Position Indexing by Tool Group Numbers

TG = gg BT = 0
TG = ggg BT = 0 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the tool group number specified in [gg] to the base cutting posi-
tion.

• Commands for BT = 0 can be omitted.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool group number in [ggg].

• Specify an offset group with OG = [1/2/3].

• The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensa-
tion number.

4-5. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Tool Group Numbers

TG = gg BT = 1
TG = ggg BT = 1 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the tool group number specified in [gg] to the vertical cutting posi-
tion.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool group number in [ggg].

• Specify an offset group with OG = [1/2/3].

• The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensa-
tion number.

4-6. Base cutting Position Indexing by Turret Numbers

T r r n n oo TP = 0
T n n ooo TP = 0 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the turret of the number specified in [tt] to the base cutting position and
begins cutting with the tool attached in the base cutting position.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool compensation number in [ooo]. The same
number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensation number.

[Supplement]

Although TP = 0 can be omitted, a simple turret indexing command will be set in this case. T2 can
be directed.
 5262-E P-9
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

4-7. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Turret Numbers

T r r n n oo TP =1
T n n ooo TP = 1

This command indexes the turret of the number specified in [tt] to the base cutting position and
begins cutting with the tool attached in the vertical cutting position.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool compensation number in [ooo]. The same
number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensation number.

4-8. ATC Position Indexing by Turret Numbers

TC = 1 H1 turret

This command indexes the turret of the number specified to the ATC position.

4-9. Independent Direction of the Tool Compensation Number, the

Nose R Compensation Number, and the Tool Diameter Compensa-
tion Number
In general, the tool compensation number, nose R compensation number or tool diameter compen-
sation number is specified by setting the compensation number together with a turret indexing com-
mand. However, by using this function, these compensation numbers can independently be set
without using a turret indexing command.

[Command format]
OF = oo
OF = ooo Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command can change the currently valid tool compensation number or nose R compensation
number.

• An error will occur if the OF command is set in the same block as the T, TL, and OG commands.

• The compensation number with the OF command will be valid for all of the tool offset number,
the nose R compensation number, and the tool diameter compensation number.
 5262-E P-10
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

5. Turret B-axis Positioning Commands

A wide variety of directing methods are available for turret positioning according to the purpose
when the B-axis one-degree indexing function or B-axis 1/1000-degree indexing function is
selected.
First understand the outline of the command systems, and see details of the directing methods.

5-1. Command Systems

Positioning from
base cutting position
Command Purpose Remarks
Positioning from
vertical cutting position
Performing posi- TL=rr t t oo BT=0 BA=[angle] G52
tioning simulta-
TL
neously with the TL=rr t t oo BT=1 BA=[angle] G52
TL command.
Performing posi- TG=gg BT=0 BA=[angle] G52
tioning simulta-
TG
neously with the TG=gg BT=1 BA=[angle] G52
TG command.
Performing posi- Trr t t oo TP=0 BA=[angle] G52
tioning simulta-
T
neously with the Trr t t oo TP=1 BA=[angle] G52
T command.
Available for only the H1
Independently
Indepen- turret.
performing posi- BA=[angle] G52
dent Angle from the base cutting
tioning.
position.

rr: Nose R compensation number

tt: Tool number
oo: Tool compensation number
angle: B-axis positioning angle directed value
G52: Edge offset calculated value at B-axis positioning
 5262-E P-11
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

5-2. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TL Com-

mand
TL = r r t t oo BT = [0/1] BA = [angle] G52
TL = t t t ooo BT = [0/1] BA = [angle] G52 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the number specified in [tt] to the cutting position specified with
BT and relatively positions it to the position equal to the angle data specified with BA from the index-
ing position.

• Commands for BT = 0 can be omitted.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool number in [ttt] and a tool compensation
number in [ooo].
The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensa-
tion number.

• The minimum setting unit of BA depends on the indexing function.

Minimum command unit = 1 degree B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function
Minimum command unit = 0.001 degree B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing function

5-3. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TG Com-

mand
TG = gg BT = [1/0] BA = [angle] G52
TL = ggg BT = [1/0] BA = [angle] G52 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the tool group number specified in [tt] to the cutting position spec-
ified with BT and relatively positions it to the position equal to the angle data specified with BA from
the indexing position.

• Commands for BT = 0 can be omitted.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool number in [ggg].

• Specify an offset group with OG = [1/2/3].

• The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensa-
tion number.

• The minimum setting unit of BA depends on the indexing function.

Minimum command unit = 1 degree B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function
Minimum command unit = 0.001 degree B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing function
 5262-E P-12
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

5-4. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the T Com-

mand
T r r n n oo TP = [1/0] BA = [angle] G52
T n n ooo TP = [1/0] BA = [angle] G52 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the turret of the number specified in [tt] to the base cutting position and rela-
tively positions it to the position equal to the angle data specified with BA from the indexing position.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool compensation number in [ooo]. The same
number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensation number.

[Supplement]

Although TP = 0 can be omitted, a simple turret indexing command will be set in this case, and
positioning with the BA command will be performed from the base cutting position.

5-5. Independent Command for Positioning B-axis

The BA command can independently be directed.
In this case, however, the same positioning as that with the following command will internally take
place. The tool offset, nose radius compensation, and tool diameter compensation numbers will be
all cleared, and they must be reset when they need to be reset.

LE32114R0100300250001
 5262-E P-13
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

5-6. Turret Rotary Position Offset Command in B-axis Positioning

(G52)
When performing machining by issuing the BA command after locating the turret in a specified posi-
tion, regular tool offset is no more effective. The tool edge position must be offset by dividing the
edge position into the X direction component and the Z direction component using the turret rotation
axis as the center.
The T, TL, and OG commands are used to index the turret, but they do not perform tool offset when
the B-axis is located in cutting position. To calculate the edge position when the BA command is
executed, execute the G52 command. By doing this, the edge position will be internally calculated
using various parameters such as turret center offset, edge position offset, turret number, and tool
offset, allowing you to set correct offset positions.

LE32114R0100300260001
 5262-E P-14
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

5-7. Terms Relevant to Turret Rotary Position Compensation

Positions indicated by the terms relevant to turret rotary position compensation

LE32114R0100300780001

LE32114R0100300780002

(1) Okuma reference point

The offset reference point is factory-set at the point where the motor rotary axis intersects with
the motor end face when the B-axis angle is set to 0°.

(2) Turret center offset

The positional relation between the Okuma reference point and the turret rotation center can be
set. Normally, this offset is already set before a machine is shipped. This value affects the cal-
culation of the turret rotary position offset command.

(3) Edge position offset

The offset from the Okuma reference point to the user reference point set by a user can be set.
 5262-E P-15
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

6. Manual Turret Indexing Operation

Although the turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machines is the H1 turret in appearance, it is
internally controlled so that 90-degree indexing is possible. For turrets that are not designed to con-
tinuously swing due to the structure of the turret, turret control is performed instead.

6-1. Turret Indexing Position

There are three turret indexing positions: the base cutting position, the vertical cutting position, and
the ATC position.
On MACTURN and MULTUS series machines, the base cutting position and the ATC position are
identical, but because the purpose of operation is different between them, for which purpose index-
ing will be performed must be selected with “turret indexing” on the ATC operation panel.

6-2. H1 Turret
The H1 turret cannot continuously swing. For this reason, the order of indexing to the cutting posi-
tion is as shown below. Additionally, since only one tool can be attached to the turret, the turret does
not operate even if the turret swing button is pressed after the tool has been indexed to the ATC
position as long as “ATC position” indexing is selected.

6-2-1. Indexing the turret to the cutting position

The turret is indexed in the order shown below. However, when the B-axis positioning command (BA
command) is set, the axis will be positioned to the position offset by the angle.

LE32114R0100300300001

6-2-2. Indexing the turret to the ATC position

T1 is indexed directly to the ATC position, irrespective of the indexed state of the turret. However, by
clicking the turret button in the state of T3, the turret suspends swinging in the state of T2. Holding
down the button indexes the turret directly to the ATC position.

6-2-3. Turret swing conditions

• Either the X-axis or Z-axis is positioned on the positive variable limit.

• On a machine equipped with a sub-spindle, the X-axis is positioned on the positive variable
limit.

• The saddle is positioned in the ATC tool replacement position.

The turret can swing when any one of the above conditions is met.
 5262-E P-16
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

7. Manual B-axis Positioning Operation

When the “B-axis one-degree pitch indexing” function or “B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing” func-
tion is selected, the turret swing can be not only positioned but also positioned as the B-axis. This
section describes B-axis positioning.
Since only the difference between one-degree pitch indexing function and 1/1000-degree pitch
indexing is the minimum command unit, note that only the command values must be replaced with
the appropriate ones when reading the text.

7-1. Positioning the B-axis

The B-axis cannot be positioned in manual operation. To position it in a specific position, executed
the BA command in advance in MDI operation mode or automatic operation mode. Once the BA
command has been executed, it remains valid until the next command is executed. It will be kept
stored even if the machine is reset or the power is turned OFF.
The issued BA command pairs up with a turret number. To index the turret for which the BA com-
mand has been executed when the turret swing button is pressed in manual operation mode, the
turret will be positioned to the position the BA command is reflected.
B-axis positioning described above cannot be performed until “cutting position” is selected for turret
indexing on the ATC operation panel.

7-2. Canceling B-axis positioning

To cancel B-axis positioning in manual turret indexing, index the turret to the base cutting position or
vertical cutting position in MDI operation mode or automatic operation mode. When no BA com-
mand is attached, [BA = 0] is considered in the NC directed and the B-axis angle data is deemed
cleared.
 5262-E P-17
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

7-3. BA Angle Data Display

The BA data after B-axis positioning will be displayed as [BA] of the current position. When the B-
axis one-degree pitch indexing function is used, decimals are not displayed. If there is a difference
between the BA command and the actual B-axis positioning angle, **** (asterisks) will be displayed.

LE32114R0100300420001
 5262-E P-18
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

8. Manual Slant Feed Function

It is possible to feed the saddle in slanted directions (X-axis - Z-axis contouring) by manual pulse
handle feed or JOG feed.

8-1. Designating a Slant Feed Direction

Set in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” on the PARAMETER/B-AXIS USER PARAMETER screen the angle
at which manual slant feed will be performed

Procedure :

1 Select parameter setting mode.

2 Using [DISPLAY CHANGE], [ITEM], etc., have the “B-AXIS USER PARAMETER” screen dis-
played.

3 Move the cursor to “SLANT FEED ANGLE,” and set specific angle data.

LE32114R0100300450001
 5262-E P-19
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

For control, set to what degrees the coordinate system formed by Z-X will be rotated around the Y-
axis.
The axis selection key (X/Z) for manual operation mode can select the axis to the coordinate system
after rotation.

X
Z'

Slant feed
rotation angle

LE32114R0100300450002

8-2. Selecting Slant Feed, Feed Operation

To perform slant feed by manual operation, the “SLANT FEED “ key on the auxiliary operation panel
to select slant feed mode. During slant feed selection, the LED on the panel remains lit.
During slant feed selection, the X-axis feed key and the Z-axis feed key are available, or pulse hand
X-axis/Y-axis selection becomes valid for the X’-axis and the Z’-axis. Other operations relating to the
Y-axis and the C-axis are the same as the regular operations.

[Supplement]

• If two or more of the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis JOG keys on the operation panel are
pressed at the same time when the “SLANT FEED” LED is lit, none of all of the feed axes will
move.
• Slant feed can be selected only in “manual operation mode or manual intervention mode” and
“Y-axis control mode.”

(1) Manual slant feed speed, slant feed distance

Manual slant feed using the JOG keys is performed at the X-axis or Z-axis manual feed unit rate
set in the axis data file, whichever is slower. The manual feed acceleration unit rate increases or
decreases with the manual feed acceleration unit rate for the axis whose manual feed unit rate
has been adopted.
The feed distance in pulse handle feed is the travel distance in the manual slant feed direction
designated by the pulse handle.
During slant feed selection, the Y-axis command is a radius value command as Y-axis control
mode is selected.

(2) Control when the axis has reached the variable limit
The X-axis or Z-axis setting position is valid as the variable limit even during manual slant feed
selection. When either the X-axis or Z-axis, which is in manual slant feed in the X’-axis or Z’-
axis, has reached the variable limit, all axis feed operations will stop, and the X’-axis or Z’-axis
will not move in the direction beyond the variable limit.
 5262-E P-20
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

8-3. Caution on Recovering from Manual Intervention

[Supplement]

If slant feed is performed and the SEQUENCE RETURN key is pressed during manual interven-
tion, the X-axis and the Y-axis independently travel to the sequence restart position and will not
linearly move back in the slant feed direction. Each axis returns at the manual feed speed. Before
pressing the SEQUENCE RESTART key, move the axes closer to the return position in advance
to minimize the axis travel distance to return.

8-4. Relationship with the Slant Compound Fixed Cycle Function

The slant angle command value, which is issued simultaneously with the slant machining mode ON
command (G127), is automatically set in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” on the B-AXIS USER PARAME-
TER screen. Before manually using the slant feed function, confirm that the feed angle set in
“SLANT FEED ANGLE” is the appropriate value.

8-5. Others
Since the turret B-axis positioning angle and the coordinate conversion angle around the Y-axis
specified in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” are independently handled, pay attention to both angle data
when drilling a slant face.
 5262-E P-21
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

9. Tool Index Function

The H1 turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machines has the same attachment structure for
both cutting tools and rotary tools. The edge of even a cutting tool can be set at any desired angle by
means of an M-axis indexing function. Making effective use of this structure and turning the edge
180 degrees make it possible to use tool for other purposes. The tool index function is intended to
index a tool and select its data.

9-1. Relation between Turret Indexing and Tool Indexing

First spindle base position Second spindle base position

Position A Position A

First spindle base position

Second spindle base position
Position B
Position B

First spindle vertical position A Second spindle vertical position B

First spindle vertical position B Second spindle vertical position A

LE32114R0100300510001

9-2. Relation between Tool Indexing and Graphic Display

The tool index function changes the graphic display based on the preset tool shape data each time
the tool direction is changed 180°.
If you set the tool shape data with its angle set at 0°, the graphic display changes when the tool is
indexed.
 5262-E P-22
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

9-3. Relation between Tool Index Command and Tool Compensation

When a tool index command is specified, the graphic display of the tool shape changes automati-
cally. However, the tool compensation data is not changed. It is, therefore, necessary to specify the
tool compensation data again after indexing the tool.
Description below is the mechanism of a machine equipped with a “tool compensation multi-system
function.”
A machine equipped with a tool compensation multi-system function has a tool compensation data
table for each of the base position, the vertical position and positions A/B (a machine having a sub-
spindle has eight data tables in all). Upon execution of a tool index command, the tool offset, nose R
compensation, and nose R compensation direction numbers switch to those shown in the opposite
position table. That is, each compensation number remains unchanged, but the compensation val-
ues specified by these compensation numbers are changed as the table itself is changed.

Position A Position B
Tool offset No.1 No.1
No.2 No.2
No.3 No.3
: :
Nose R No.1 No.1
compensation No.2 No.2
No.3 No.3
: :
Nose R No.1 No.1
direction No.2 No.2
No.3 No.3
: :
LE32114R0100300530001

For example, when the dot-meshed compensation of No. 2 is selected in position A, the compensa-
tion switches to No. 2 in the table under Position B upon execution of tool indexing. Since the tables
are independent, the compensation values are different between them.

9-4. Tool Index Commands

(1) M codes
The following M codes are used to index an M-tool spindle:
M602: Command for indexing the M-tool spindle at 0° position and clamping it.
M603: Command for indexing the M-tool spindle at 180° position and clamping it.

9-5. Relation between Rotary Tool and Tool Index Commands

The tool index command can be specified even if a rotary tool is mounted.
Since the rotary tool can be used for turning as well as milling, it is necessary to specify the tool
index command according to the purpose of use.
As described in 9-3. “Relation between Tool Index Command and Tool Compensation”, if the tool off-
set multi-system is provided, the tool offset table changes upon designation of a tool index com-
mand even when using a rotary tool for milling.
Set the tool offset data used only for milling in position A, and after specifying the tool index com-
mand, return the tool to position A before performing milling.
 5262-E P-23
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

10. Parameter Settings

10-1. B-axis User Parameters

(1) Slant feed angle
This parameter sets the Z-X coordinate turning angle in manual slant feed of the saddle.
Setting unit : 1°
Setting range : -359.999° to 359.999°
Initial value : 0.000°

(2) Tool edge offset

This parameter sets the offset from the Okuma reference point to the user reference point set
by a user. When the edge offset is changed, the tool offset must be reset.
Setting unit : 1 mm
Setting range : -9999.999 to 9999.999
Initial value : 0.000

10-2. B-axis System Parameters

(1) Turret center offset
The positional relation between the Okuma reference point and the turret rotation center can be
set. Normally, this offset is already set before a machine is shipped.
Setting unit : 1 mm
Setting range : -9999.999 to 9999.999
Initial value : 0.000

10-3. Turret Position Error Compensation

Turret position error compensation in the reference cutting position is the same as general turret
position error compensation. However, turret position error compensation in the vertical cutting posi-
tion becomes valid only when the “B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function” and the “B-axis 1/
1000-degree pitch indexing function” are not provided.
The turret compensation number is selected based on only the turret number. For example, the
compensation value for “turret No. 2 in the vertical cutting position” is used for the turret position
error compensation value for machining with the tool attached to turret No. 1 in the vertical cutting
position.
Setting unit : 1 mm
Setting range : -9999.999 - 9999.999
Initial value : 0.000

10-4. B-axis Indexing Angles

This parameter is displayed only when the B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function is selected.
Set the indexing position of each B-axis corresponding to the B-axis positioning command.
Setting unit : 0.001 degrees
Setting range : 0.000 degrees - 359.000 degrees
Initial value : Set for each point according to the following rule:
Initial value = (Point number - 1) x 1.000 degree
 5262-E P-24
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

10-5. M-axis Orientation

This parameter becomes valid only when the M-axis fixed position stop function and the B-axis con-
trol function are selected. Set M-axis orientation when the M-axis is indexed to the base cutting posi-
tion, and that when it is indexed to the ATC position for each turret number.
Setting unit : 1 degree
Setting range : 0.000 - 359.999
Initial value : 0.000

10-6. System Parameters

When the machine is equipped with an H1 turret and an inductosyn detection function or pitch error
compensation function, the following “origin offset” parameter will be added to the system parameter
T-axis. Detector offset, backlash, in-position, detector, and connection compensation are the same
as the regular parameters.

(1) Origin offset

This parameter is used to compensate for the detector offset when it is not 0.000 degrees due
to Inductosyn connection or for some other reason although the offset was set so that the
mechanical coordinates would be 0.000 degrees by indexing turret No. 1 to the base cutting
position.
Setting unit : 1 degree
Setting range : -0.999 - +0.999
Initial value : 0.000
 5262-E P-25
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

10-7. Optional Parameters

This parameter becomes valid when the tool compensation multi-system function is selected.

(1) Vertical position command SP

This parameter enables a machine with the tool compensation multi-system function to switch
the tool compensation table to be used according to the turret indexing state (for base position
and vertical position).
On a machine equipped with a B-axis positioning function, the physical state of the turret is the
same when base cutting position indexing BA = 90 is executed and when vertical position
indexing is performed. However, the tool compensation data of the table for the base position is
used for the former, and that of the table for the vertical position for the latter. With this parame-
ter, whether base position or vertical position tool compensation will be used when base cutting
position indexing BA = 90 is executed can be selected.
INVALID : The base position tool compensation data will be used.
EFFECT : The vertical position tool compensation data will be used.
Initial value : INVALID

(2) Tool offset automatic calculation

A machine with the tool compensation multi-system function has a tool compensation table for
each system. However, it uses the same tools in principle, and it is, therefore, possible to
roughly calculate the tool offset data on the other tools by internal operation if the tool offset
data on any one of the tools is obtained.
This automatic calculation function becomes valid at tool offset measurement with a touch sen-
sor. Automatic calculation will not be performed in manually setting, adding or calculating the
tool offset. With this parameter, whether the data on other systems will be automatically calcu-
lated can be selected.
INVALID : Automatic calculation will not be performed.
EFFECT : Automatic calculation will be performed.
Initial value : EFFECT

10-8. Machine System Parameters

This parameter sets the turret index prohibition area in turret index control.
The turret index prohibition area is specified with the angle position of the boundary the turret must
not enter and the angle width of the prohibition area. To disable turret index control, set “0.000” in
the field of “Turret index prohibition width.”

(1) Turret index boundary angle

Set the negative side angle of the prohibition area.
Setting unit : 1 degree
Setting range : 0.000 - 359.999
Initial value : 0.000

(2) Turret index prohibition width

Set the angle width that defines the boundary the turret must not enter.
Setting unit : 1 degree
Setting range : 0.000 - 359.999
Initial value : 0.000
 5262-E P-26
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

11. Tool Data Setting

11-1. Tool Shape Data

The TOOL SHAPE screen displayed in tool data setting mode is used to set the graphic data on the
tools to be used for machining simulation. The B-axis control turret is indexed to the base cutting
position and the vertical cutting position and thereby ensures machining in two ways. The tool shape
data is set for the base cutting position and for the vertical cutting position, and the data is switched
according to the command.

(1) Setting the tool shape data

For how to set tool shape data, see the operation manual as the procedure is the same as the
standard setting.
To display the base cutting position tool shape screen or vertical cutting position tool shape
screen, press the function key [F4] (CUTTING POSITION). Each time the function key is
pressed, [BASE] and [VERTICAL] are switched alternately.

LE32114R0100300650001
 5262-E P-27
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

11-2. Tool Compensation

This section describes the basic concept of tool compensation on MACTURN and MULTUS series
machines.
As shown in the figures below, the table of tool offset, nose R compensation, and nose R direction is
common to base cutting position and vertical cutting position indexing. For this reason, the same
tool compensation number cannot be used for base cutting position indexing and vertical cutting
position indexing.
Although “base position” and “vertical position” tool shape codes are available for graphic drawing,
tool shape data is shared.

When a spindle is used

Cutting position
Base position Vertical position
Table

Tool offset
Nose R compensation
Nose R direction

Shape code
(type, shape No.,
classification)

Shape data (edge angle,

cutter angle, etc.)

LE32114R0100300660001

When two spindles are used

Cutting position First spindle First spindle Second spindle Second spindle
Table base position vertical position vertical position base position
Tool offset
Nose R compensation
Nose R direction

Shape code
(type, shape No.,
classification)

Shape data (edge angle,

cutter angle, etc.)

LE32114R0100300660002
 5262-E P-28
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

11-3. Tool Life Management (Special Function)

The OG command issued by the tool life management function is to specify which number of tool
compensation value in the tool compensation group set for the tool in tool data setting mode to use.
Some tools attached to the H1 turret machines perform cutting in both the base cutting position and
the vertical cutting position, but the same tool compensation number cannot be used for two cutting
positions because the edge positions are different. The tool group number and offset group number
for tool life management can, therefore, be used for the “base position” and the “vertical position”
respectively. A tool information table for tool life management is available for each cutting position,
and three sets of offset group numbers can be selected as in general tool life management.

LE32114R0100300670001

Press the function key [F4] (CUTTING POSITION) on the second page of functions to switch the
tool life management table for the base cutting position or vertical cutting position.
 5262-E P-29
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

12. Tool Compensation Multi-System Function

A table containing general information about tools (compensation data, shape data) is prepared
base on the turret. So, the same offset number cannot be used when tools having two or more coor-
dinate systems, such as sub-spindles, are used or when the same tool is used for different indexing
operations like MACTURN and MULTUS series machines.
The tool compensation multi-system function divides the purposes of use of tools in a systematic
manner and makes independent offset numbers available for each system.

12-1. Combinations of Compensation Systems

The following are the functions that are available for system combinations according to the purposes
of use of tools:

• H1 turret function

• Tool compensation multi-system function

• Tool index function

This manual describes the sub-spindle model because it covers all the machine models.
In the case of single spindle model, regard it as the machine equipped only with the first spindle.

<Combination of permissible selections>

Combination OK OK OK OK N/A OK N/A OK

H1 turret Unselect Select Unselect Select Unselect Select Unselect Select
Tool compensation
Unselect Unselect Select Select Unselect Unselect Select Select
multi-system
Tool index Unselect Unselect Unselect Unselect Select Select Select Select
Compensation data
1 2 - 3 - 4
structure
 5262-E P-30
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

12-2. Tool Compensation Data Structure

In the following table, the dot-shaded fields show a table. For example, if the dot-shaded field on the
line of tool offset, nose R compensation, and nose R direction is across the columns of first spindle
base position, first spindle vertical position, second spindle vertical position, and second spindle
base position, the tool compensation table is shared by the systems. Divided dot-shaded fields on
the same line indicate that different tables are used for the systems.

Compensation data structure 1

System First spindle First spindle Second spindle Second spindle

Table base position vertical position vertical position base position
Tool offset
Nose R compensation
Nose R direction
Shape code
(type, shape No.,
classification)

Shape data (edge

angle, cutter angle, et.)
Tool group No.
Offset group No.
LE32114R0100300700001

Compensation data structure 2

System First spindle First spindle Second spindle Second spindle

Table base position vertical position vertical position base position
Tool offset
Nose R compensation
Nose R direction
Shape code
(type, shape No.,
classification)

Shape data (edge

angle, cutter angle, et.)
Tool group No.
Offset group No.
LE32114R0100300700002
 5262-E P-31
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

Compensation data structure 3

System First spindle base position First spindle vertical position Second spindle vertical position Second spindle base position
Table Position A Position B Position A Position B Position A Position B Position A Position B
Tool offset
Nose R compensation
Nose R direction
Shape code
A/B automatic A/B automatic A/B automatic
(type, shape No.,
switching switching switching
classification)

Shape data (edge

angle, cutter angle, et.)
Tool group No.
Offset group No.
LE32114R0100300700003

Compensation data structure 4

System First spindle base position First spindle vertical position Second spindle vertical position Second spindle base position
Table Position A Position B Position A Position B Position A Position B Position A Position B
Tool offset
Nose R compensation
Nose R direction
Shape code A/B automatic A/B automatic A/B automatic
(type, shape No., switching switching switching
classification)

Shape data (edge

angle, cutter angle, et.)
Tool group No.
Offset group No.
LE32114R0100300700004

“Position A” and “Position B” in the tables above are position A and position B of the tool index func-
tion.
“A/B automatic switching” in the tables means that the shape code automatically changes when
position A or position B is switched to the other by tool indexing.
* By selecting the tool compensation multi-system control function, the handling of the tool group
and offset group greatly varies between tool compensation (tool offset, nose R compensation,
nose R direction) and tool life management. An independent compensation table for tool com-
pensation is provided for each system, whereas the information tables for tool life management
are common to the systems.
However, the tool compensation data indirectly connected by an offset group is independently
available for each system, and it does not actually cause any problem in common information
tables.
 5262-E P-32
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

12-3. Selecting the TOOL COMPENSATION Screen with the Tool Com-
pensation Multi-system Function
The system displayed on the TOOL OFFSET/NOSE R COMPENSATION screen in tool data setting
mode can be switched by pressing the function key [F3] (CUTTING POSITION) on the second page
of functions.

• Without the tool index function

Base position Vertical position Base position

LE32114R0100300710001

• With the tool index function

Base position/position A Base position/position B Vertical position/position A

Vertical position/position B Base position/position A
LE32114R0100300710002

* On a machine equipped with a sub-spindle, the first spindle or second spindle is switched to
the other by pressing the spindle selector button on the additional operation panel.

12-4. Tool Life Management Tool Information Screen for the Tool Com-
pensation Multi-system Function
There are three tool life management information screens: A (number of workpieces machined),
B (machining time), and C (wear amount). Each information screen is common to all systems.
 5262-E P-33
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

12-5. System Variables

When the tool compensation multi-system function is selected, it means that there are two or more
tool compensation tables. Up to eight tool compensation tables exist, including machines equipped
with a sub-spindle and the tool index function. System variables are available for each system to
refer to or set compensation data for each system from the program.

Tool offset

System variable Subscript type Description

VTF*A [subscript type] First spindle base position/position A tool offset
VTF*B [subscript type] First spindle vertical position/position A tool offset
VTF*C [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position A tool offset
VTF*D [subscript type] 1 - 32 Second spindle vertical position/position A tool offset
VTF*E [subscript type] 1 - 96 First spindle base position/position B tool offset
VTF*F [subscript type] 1 - 200 First spindle base position/position B tool offset
VTF*G [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position B tool offset
VTF*H [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position B tool offset
VTOF* [subscript type] Tool offset in currently selected position

*=X, Z, Y

Nose R compensation

System variable Subscript type Description

First spindle base position/position A nose R compen-
VNR*A [subscript type]
sation
First spindle vertical position/position A nose R com-
VNR*B [subscript type]
pensation
Second spindle base position/position A nose R com-
VNR*C [subscript type]
pensation
Second spindle vertical position/position A nose R
VNR*D [subscript type]
1 - 32 compensation
1 - 96 First spindle base position/position B nose R compen-
VNR*E [subscript type]
1 - 200 sation
First spindle base position/position B nose R compen-
VNR*F [subscript type]
sation
Second spindle base position/position B nose R com-
VNR*G [subscript type]
pensation
Second spindle base position/position B nose R com-
VNR*H [subscript type]
pensation
VNSR* [subscript type] Nose R compensation currently selected position
 5262-E P-34
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

13. Other Functions

13-1. Tool Compensation Automatic Calculation Function

A machine with the tool compensation multi-system function has a tool compensation table for each
system. However, it uses the same tools in principle, and it is, therefore, possible to roughly calcu-
late the tool offset data on the other tools by internal operation if the tool offset data on any one of
the tools is obtained.
This automatic calculation function is applicable to the data on the tool number in the field (tool off-
set or nose R compensation (including compensation direction)) in which the cursor is placed. The
tool compensation system currently selected is the basis for calculation.
Pressing the function key [AUTO CAL] activates the automatic calculation function.

13-2. Turret Coolant Interlock

The turret coolant can be output only when the turret is performing cutting position indexing.
When the turret is performing ATC position indexing or has not completed indexing, it will not be out-
put even if the coolant operation switch on the operation panel is turned ON. Perform a coolant
operation after cutting position indexing has been completed.
Additionally, the turret coolant will not be output as long as the shutter of the ATC is open.
 5262-E P-35
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

13-3. Data Input/Output Function

The H1 turret machine switches base position indexing or vertical position indexing to the other
according to the purpose, and has a tool compensation table for each system. The tool compensa-
tion data structure is different depending on whether the “tool compensation multi-system control
function” is selected. The following table summarizes the data structures. For the operation of the
data input/output function, see the “Operation Manual.”
The data input/output procedure for turret B of a two-saddle machine is the same as general data
input/output. See the “Operation Manual.”

(1) When the tool compensation multi-system control function is selected

Data type Identifier Description of data
Tool offset T1 X (X-axis)
Z (Z-axis)
Y (Y-axis)
Nose R compensation T2 X (X-axis)
Z (Z-axis)
Q (pattern number)
For B-axis control T19 <First spindle base position>
A (tool offset group 1)
• Tool offset group
B (tool offset group 2)
• Tool classification C (tool offset group 3)
D (tool classification code)
• Tool shape data
E (tool shape code)
<First spindle vertical position>
H (tool offset group 1)
I (tool offset group 2)
J (tool offset group 3)
K (tool classification code)
L (tool shape code)
<Second spindle base position>
P (tool offset group 1)
Q (tool offset group 2)
R (tool offset group 3)
S (tool classification code)
T (tool shape code)
<Second spindle vertical position>
U (tool offset group 1)
V (tool offset group 2)
W (tool offset group 3)

(2) When the tool compensation multi-system control function is not selected
Data type Identifier Description of data
Tool offset T1 <First spindle base position/position A>
X (X-axis)
Z (Z-axis)
Y (Y-axis)
Nose R compensation T2 <First spindle base position/position A>
X (X-axis)
Z (Z-axis)
Q (pattern number)
 5262-E P-36
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

Data type Identifier Description of data

<First spindle base T20 X (X-axis tool offset)
position/position B> Z (Z-axis tool offset)
Y (Y-axis tool offset)
• Tool offset
I (X-axis nose R compensation)
• Nose R compensa- K (Z-axis nose R compensation)
tion Q (pattern number)
<First spindle vertical T21 X (X-axis tool offset)
position/position A> Z (Z-axis tool offset)
Y (Y-axis tool offset)
• Tool offset
I (X-axis nose R compensation)
• Nose R compensa- K (Z-axis nose R compensation)
tion Q (pattern number)
<First spindle vertical T22 X (X-axis tool offset)
position/position B> Z (Z-axis tool offset)
Y (Y-axis tool offset)
• Tool offset
I (X-axis nose R compensation)
• Nose R compensa- K (Z-axis nose R compensation)
tion Q (pattern number)
<Second spindle base T23 X (X-axis tool offset)
position/position A> Z (Z-axis tool offset)
Y (Y-axis tool offset)
• Tool offset
I (X-axis nose R compensation)
• Nose R compensa- K (Z-axis nose R compensation)
tion Q (pattern number)
<Second spindle base T24 X (X-axis tool offset)
position/position B> Z (Z-axis tool offset)
Y (Y-axis tool offset)
• Tool offset
I (X-axis nose R compensation)
• Nose R compensa- K (Z-axis nose R compensation)
tion Q (pattern number)
<Second spindle verti- T25 X (X-axis tool offset)
cal position/position A> Z (Z-axis tool offset)
Y (Y-axis tool offset)
• Tool offset
I (X-axis nose R compensation)
• Nose R compensa- K (Z-axis nose R compensation)
tion Q (pattern number)
<Second spindle verti- T26 X (X-axis tool offset)
cal position/position B> Z (Z-axis tool offset)
Y (Y-axis tool offset)
• Tool offset
I (X-axis nose R compensation)
• Nose R compensa- K (Z-axis nose R compensation)
tion Q (pattern number)
For B-axis control T19 A (tool offset group 1)
B (tool offset group 2)
• Tool offset group
C (tool offset group 3)
• Tool classification D (tool classification code)
E (tool shape code)
• Tool shape data
 5262-E P-37
SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

13-4. Interlock
(1) Turret swing conditions
The H1 turret can rotate when it is at only the “X-axis positive limit”.

(2) Tool rotation command interlock

a. M spindle interlock during M tool unclamping

During M tool unclamping, the M spindle is subjected to the restriction of 60% of the rated
torque and kept disabled from rotating, stopping at a fixed position, inching, and swinging
(including synchronous taping and flat tapping).

The M-axis does not stop at a fixed position with a turret ATC position indexing command
(however, the M-axis fixed position stop command from the ATC is valid).
 5262-E P-38
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

1. Overview
The ATC unit discussed here exchanges the tools in the turret with the tools stored in the magazine.
The ATC provided in MACTURN and MULTUS is NC-controlled and rotates, advances, or retracts
its tool change arm by the BL motor.

Special (Optional) Specifications

This manual describes the specifications for the lathe having the ATC unit.
Since these specifications are only for the users who selected such an option.
For the specifications for each machine, refer to the final specification.

2. Machine Specifications

2-1. Outline of the Machine

2-1-1. Turret

MACTURN 30/50 has an H2 turret while MACTURN 250/350/550 and MULTUS-B300/B400 has an
H1 turret to which an L or M tool can be mounted.
For details of indexing, refer to A. TURRET OPERATION.

T3
T1
T1

H2 Turret H1Turret

LE32114R0100400020001

Fig.2-1 Turret (Viewed from the Machine Front)

 5262-E P-39
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

2-1-2. Magazine

Magazine pots can store an L-tool, an M-tool, a DT tool (dummy tool) or a sensor. Concerning a
sensor, note that only a sensor that can be handled by the ATC unit may be used.

• The magazine has two tool index positions. They are the ATC position where automatic tool
change is performed by the ATC, and the manual tool change position where a tool is manually
mounted to or removed from a magazine pot.

• When storing a super-large diameter tool in the magazine, the super-large diameter tool storing
pot must be surrounded by empty pots. In other words, if a super-large diameter tool is stored
in the magazine, the adjacent pots cannot store a tool. The pots under such state are called a
“dummy pot”.

Standard tool Super-large diameter tool

Dummy pot

Magazine Magazine Magazine

No."n-1" No."n" No."n+1"
LE32114R0100400030001

• Similarly, a dummy pot is secured for an R-large diameter tool and an L-large diameter tool.
With an R-large diameter tool, the pot at the right side (magazine number “n-1”) of the pot (mag-
azine number “n”) where an R-large diameter tool is stored is secured as a dummy pot. With an
L-large diameter tool, the pot at the left side (magazine number “n+1”) of the pot (magazine
number “n”) where an L-large diameter tool is stored is secured as a dummy pot.

• When a large diameter tool is stored in the magazine (pot number “n”), only a standard tool can
be stored in the adjacent pots (magazine pot number “n-1” and “n+1”). It is impossible to store a
super-large diameter tool in either pot, a left-large diameter tool in the right pot or a right large
diameter tool in the left pot (MULTUS-B300/B400 only).

• When a large, super-large, right-large or left-large diameter tool is returned from the turret to the
magazine, the tool is always returned to the pot where it was stored previously. The pot where
any of a super-large, an R-large and an L-large diameter tool is stored is recognized as the pot
for which the tool to be returned is determined (the pot is called a “reserved pot”) when a tool is
removed from such a pot. Tools other than the previously stored tool are not returned to the pot
recognized as the reserved pot.
 5262-E P-40
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

2-1-3. Cutting Tools

Tool numbers from No.1 to No.95 can be used. (This number range is expanded to No.1 to No.200 if
the function for managing 200 sets of tools is selected.) These numbers can be also used as the tool
offset number.
The tool management data indicated below is set for the individual tools in the tool data setting
mode. It is possible to change tool change arm operating speed when handling a heavy tool. In the
tool data setting mode, set the heavy tool identification code. When the ATC handles the tool spec-
ified as a heavy tool, tool change arm operating speed (rotation, advance and retraction) is changed
to a lower speed.
The NC ATC specification requires the following data to be set.

• Tool number

• Tool kind (L-tool, M-tool, DT-tool, sensor)

• Tool size / tool weight

(Standard, R-large / Heavy, L-large / Heavy, Super-large / Heavy / Super large: Heavy / Large:
Heavy)
 5262-E P-41
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

2-2. Machine Operation

ATC Operation of MULTUS-B300/B400

Magazine MG
rotation

Tool change arm EA Ready station tool

in RS position insert/extract

Tool change arm

in ATC position

Ready station RS
Tool change arm EA
in tool change/MG position
rotation (EC axis)

Tool change arm/

M-tool spindle position interlock

Tool change arm EA

movement (EZ axis)

Tool change arm

(Insert/Extract)

M-tool spindle
Indexing
ATC shutter
M-tool spindle lock pin open/close
clamp/unclamp
LE32114R0100400050001

LE32114R0100400050002
 5262-E P-42
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

2-3. ATC Operation

MULTUS-B300/B400

S1 Waiting for next tool command

S2 Magazine (MG) indexing
S3 Ready station (RS) tool extraction
S4 RS change position
S5 RS tool extraction
S6 RS MG position
S7 Waiting for machine cycle end
S8 Tool change arm (EA) tool insertion/Shutter close
S9 EA Rotation (90°)
S10 Turret Tool clamp
S11 EA tool extraction
S12 EA Rotation (180°)
S13 EA tool insertion
S14 Turret Tool clamp
S15 EA Rotation 90°
S16 EA RS position/Shutter close
S17 MG return pot indexing (EA)
S18 RS change position
S19 RS tool insertion
S20 RS MG position
S21 RS tool extraction

MACTURN250/350

S1 Waiting for next tool command

S2 Magazine (MG) indexing
S3 RS tool insertion
S4 RS change position
S5 RS tool extraction/Shutter 2 close
S6 Waiting for the machine cycle end
S7 Starting the MG return pot indexing
S8 Shutter open
S9 Tool change EA clamp
Turret Tool unclamp
EA tool extraction
EA Rotation (180°)
EA tool insertion
Turret Tool clamp
EA retract position
S10 Shutter close
S11 MG return pot indexing (RS)
S12 RS tool insertion/Shutter 2 close
 5262-E P-43
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

S13 RS MG position
S14 RS tool extraction
MACTURN550

S1 Waiting for next tool command

S2 Magazine (MG) indexing
S3 Sub-arm (SA) MG position
S4 SA Tool lock
S5 SA tool extraction
S6 SA RS position
S7 SA tool insertion
S8 SA Tool unlock
S9 SA retract position
S10 Waiting for the command (M06 command)
S11 Starting the MG return pot indexing (Turret)
S12 ATC Shutter close
Turret Tool unclamp low pressure
S13 RS change position
S14 Shutter 2 close
S15 Shutter open
S16 Tool change EA clamp
Turret Tool unclamp
EA tool extraction
EA Rotation (180°)
EA tool insertion
Turret Tool clamp
EA retract position
S17 Shutter close
S18 Shutter 2 close
S19 RS MG position
S20 MG return pot indexing (RS)
S21 SA RS position
S22 SA Tool lock
S23 SA tool extraction
S24 SA MG position
S25 SA tool insertion
S26 SA Tool unlock
S27 SA intermediate position
 5262-E P-44
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

3. ATC Logic Tables

See Appendix for the ATC logic tables.

3-1. Input Logic Tables

The input logic tables indicate the input signal statuses of ATC units necessary for the completion of
individual ATC sequences.

(1) Symbols

: Inputs that must be ON.

A/ : Input conditions for A mode

B/ : Input conditions for B mode

: Inputs that may be either ON or OFF.

(The input conditions that correspond to [ ] of the B–test data must be OFF.
For the B–test data, refer to the input logic tables.)

SA: Sub arm

RS: Ready station
EA: Tool change arm
MG: Magazine
T: Turret
LE32114R0100400080001

(2) Status Input Items

a. The ON/OFF status of inputs No. 0120 to No. 0502 can be confirmed on the CHECK DATA
ATC INPUT screen (See also Section 8 “ATC Status Display”.).

b. Concerning the item of “T Tool change position”, the status input is assumed to be ON (sat-
isfied) when the actual position is within “0.1 mm of the position (machine coordinate) set at
the parameter setting screen.

(3) How to Read the Input Logic Tables

The input logic tables show the ATC steps in the left part and the ON/OFF status of the input
signals required to complete the individual steps is indicated in the corresponding lines.
The Auto-branch data indicates that if M228 is executed, the ATC sequence No. branches to
the specified sequence.
 5262-E P-45
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

3-2. Output Logic Tables

The output logic tables indicate the signals output at each ATC operation sequence.

(1) Symbols

: ON output

: OFF output

A/ : A–mode output

B/ : B–mode output

: Outputs that go OFF when the NC is reset during operation

SA: Sub arm

RS: Ready station
EA: Tool change arm
MG: Magazine
T: Turret
LE32114R0100400090001

(2) Operation Output Items

a. ON/OFF status of all output items can be checked at the CHECK DATA ATC OUTPUT
screen (See also Section 8 “ATC Status Display”.).

(3) How to Read the Output Logic Tables

The output logic tables show the ATC steps in the left part and the ON/OFF status of the input
signals required to execute the individual steps is indicated in the corresponding lines.

3-3. Manual Interlock Tables

During manual ATC operation using the 1-step advance/1-step reverse function, ATC operation
sequence advances or returns by one step when all of the input conditions indicated in the interlock
tables are satisfied.
The tables can be read in the same manner as the input and output logic tables.
Manual step branch and manual step back show the destination of ATC sequence number where
operation branches during 1-step advance/1-step reverse operation.
 5262-E P-46
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

4. Manual Operation

4-1. Manual Magazine Operation

4-1-1. Magazine Operation Panel (MACTURN 250/350/550)

(Manual Magazine Operation Screen) (Tool Entry Screen)

INT POT NO. 32

POT NO. 32 TOOL NO. 19 CLR
TOOL NO. 19 L STD
INDEX NO. 32 KIND L

SIZE STD SET

CCW CW INDEX RESTART

INDEX NO. TOOL NO. KIND SIZE

NO.1234 NO.1234 L Turning STD Standard

7 8 9 7 8 9 M Millng BR R- large
4 5 6 4 5 6 S Senser B L- large
1 2 3 1 2 3 DT Dummy E E- large
0 CLR ENT 0 CLR ENT H Heavy

(Index Number Setting) (Tool Number Setting) (Tool Kind Setting) (Tool Size Setting)
LE32114R0100400110001

The magazine operation panel screen transfers in the manner as illustrated above.
As the main screen, the manual magazine operation screen and the tool entry screen are provided
and the selection of the desired main screen is possible by pressing the [ ] or [ ] button (page
button). These main screens has sub pop-up screens used for setting the magazine pot and tool
related data (index number, tool number, tool kind and tool size). To call the desired sub screen,
press the corresponding button as shown above.
 5262-E P-47
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(1) Manual Magazine Operation Screen

Use this screen to manually index the magazine.

a. [INT] button
The magazine operation panel may be used only in the manual intervention state. The
[INT] button is not operative in the following cases.

• The present ATC sequence is neither the ATC start state nor the next tool prepared
state.

• An ATC command is being executed.

• The ATC is in the manual operation mode.

• A tool is being manually mounted/removed at the turret.

• The magazine is waiting for the pressing of the [RESTART] button (blinking).

The indicating lamp at the side of the [INT] button lights when the magazine enters the
manual intervention state.
To cancel the manual intervention state, press the [INT] button again. If the button is
pressed while the magazine is rotating or the magazine is waiting for the pressing of
the [INDEX] button (blinking), pressing of the [INT] button is disregarded and the man-
ual intervention state is not canceled.

b. [POT No.] button

The button is used to index the magazine by designating the magazine pot number.
Press this button before pressing the [INDEX No.] button and the magazine pot number
can be designated.
The magazine pot number of the magazine pot that is currently indexed to the manual tool
mounting/removal position is displayed in the field at the right of the [POT No.] button.
In the state the pot number designation is selected, the [POT No.] button is displayed in the
ON state.

c. [TOOL No.] button

The button is used to index the magazine by designating the tool number.
Press this button before pressing the [INDEX No.] button and the tool number can be des-
ignated.
The information of the tool stored in the magazine pot that is currently indexed to the man-
ual tool mounting/removal position is displayed in the field at the right of the [TOOL No.]
button.
In the state the tool number designation is selected, the [TOOL No.] button is displayed in
the ON state.

d. [INDEX No.] button

The button is used to display the 10-key sub screen used for setting a pot number or a tool
number. After selecting the designation target (pot number or tool number) by the opera-
tion in (b) or (c), press the [INDEX No.] key and the 10-key sub screen appears. Input the
pot or tool number and press the [ENT] key, then the pop-up screen is cleared. The desig-
nated index number is displayed in the field at the right of the [INDEX No.] button.
 5262-E P-48
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

e. [CCW] button
The button is used to rotate the magazine counterclockwise to index the next pot. The
magazine keeps rotating if the button is kept pressed. Note the button is not operative
unless the following conditions are satisfied.

• The magazine is not rotating.

• The magazine door is closed.

• The sub-arm is at either the RS position or the standby position.

• The tool in the manual tool mounting/removal position is clamped (only for MACTURN
550).

f. [CW] button
The button is used to rotate the magazine clockwise to index the next pot. The magazine
keeps rotating if the button is kept pressed. Note the button is not operative unless the fol-
lowing conditions are satisfied.

• The magazine is not rotating.

• The magazine door is closed.

• The sub-arm is at either the RS position or the standby position.

• The tool in the manual tool mounting/removal position is clamped (only for MACTURN
550).

g. [INDEX] button
The button is used to index the magazine pot or the tool of the number displayed at the
INDEX No. data field into the manual tool removal/mounting position along the shortest
path. The [INDEX] button is lit while the magazine is rotating to index the specified target
(tool or pot).
The [INDEX] button begins blinking if the magazine enters the slide hold state during its
rotation, started by the pressing of the [INDEX] button. When the [INDEX] button is
pressed in the state all of the conditions stated in items (e) and (f) are satisfied, the maga-
zine starts rotating again.

h. [RESTART] button
When an ATC command is read while the magazine is in the manual intervention state or in
the state the magazine door is open, execution of the ATC command is suspended. When
the magazine is set in the ATC command executable state by canceling the manual inter-
vention state by closing the magazine door, the [RESTART] button starts blinking. Press
the [RESTART] button while it is blinking. The button stops blinking and the ATC command
is executed.

i. [ ] (page) button
Press the [ ] (page) button while the magazine is in the manual intervention state to
change the screen to the tool entry screen.
 5262-E P-49
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(2) Tool Entry Screen

Use this screen to set the information of the tools to be stored in the magazine.

a. POT NO. display

This displays the magazine pot number of the pot indexed at the manual tool mounting/
removal position.

b. TOOL No.] button

The button is used to set the tool number of the tool presently located at the manual tool
mounting/removal position.
The 10-key sub screen appears when this button is pressed. Input the tool number and
press the [ENT] key. The input number is displayed in the data field at the right of the
[TOOL No.] button.

c. [KIND] button
The button is used to set the tool kind of the tool presently located at the manual tool
mounting/removal position.
The tool kind setting sub screen appears when this button is pressed. Select the tool kind,
and the selected tool kind is displayed in the data field at the right of the [KIND] button.
When the tool kind is selected, “STD” is automatically displayed for [SIZE].

d. [SIZE] button
The button is used to set the tool size of the tool presently located at the manual tool
mounting/removal position.
The tool size setting sub screen appears when this button is pressed. Select the tool size,
and the selected tool size is displayed in the data field at the right of the [SIZE] button.

e. [CLR] button
The button is used to clear the information displayed at the tool entry screen. That is, tool
number is cleared to “0000” and the settings of the tool kind and tool size are cleared and
the data fields are blanked.

f. [SET] button
The button is used to enter the tool information displayed at the tool entry screen.
The tool information having been set using the sub screens is simply displayed at the tool
entry screen unless the [SET] button is pressed. To enter the set tool information displayed
at the tool entry screen, the [SET] button must be pressed. If the tool entry screen is
changed to another screen before you press the [SET] button, the tool information having
been selected using the sub screens is discarded.
When the [SET] button is pressed while leaving the KIND and SIZE data fields blank, “DT”
(dummy tool) and “STD” (standard) are entered, respectively.

g. [ ] (page) button
Press the [ ] (page) button while the magazine is in the manual intervention state to
change the screen to the manual magazine operation screen.
 5262-E P-50
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(3) Error Display Screen

If an operation error is made during the operation at the magazine operation panel, an error
message is displayed. Press the [ ] button to clear the error screen.
Error Code Error Message Description
20002 ATC tool number An attempt was made to enter the tool number having
registration been entered to other pot.
20003 Tool number not Tool selection command to index a tool which has not
found been entered was executed.
20004 Large-tool registra- An attempt was made to enter a large-diameter tool to a
tion error pot where such entry is not allowed.
20005 Fixed pot registration Tool entry was made for a reserved pot.
error
20006 Fixed pot delete Tool deletion was made for a reserved pot.
error
20007 Pot number not Tool selection command to index a non-existing pot
found number was executed.

(4) Tool Number Display for Dummy Pot and Reserved Pot
If a tool pot set as a dummy or reserved pot is indexed to the manual tool mounting/removal
position, the following code is displayed as a tool kind.
Dummy pot D
Reserved pot R
In this case, the tool number of the corresponding tool is displayed in the [TOOL NO.] data field.
 5262-E P-51
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

4-1-2. Magazine Operation Panel (MULTUS-B300/B400)

(1) MG Manual Interruption
When the ATC operation sequence number is “S1 Waiting for next tool command” or “S7 Wait-
ing for machine cycle end”, the MG manual interruption mode can be established by turning on
the interruption ON/OFF select SW. Once the machine enters MG manual interruption mode,
the mode is not turned off even if the machine is reset. To switch the mode OFF, the following
operation is required.
However, the machine does not enter MG manual interruption mode under the following situa-
tions even if the ATC operation sequence is set to the above numbers. To enter MG manual
interruption mode, the interruption ON/OFF select SW must be turned on after canceling the fol-
lowing states.

- Executing the ATC manual operation, ATC individual operation or manually attaching or
removing the turret tool
- Executing the ATC command (MT, M06, M228 and MG commands)
- The machine is operating.
- The machine is locked.

When the “Interruption ON/OFF Select” SW on the MG panel is turned off while the machine is
in MG manual operation interruption mode, the MG manual interruption mode is turned off.
Although the main MG manual interruption can be disabled regardless of the ATC operation
sequence, the “MG door is closed” is required to disable the MG manual interruption. The MG
manual interruption cannot be disabled even if the interruption mode is selected while the MG
manual operation interruption is enabled and the MG door is not closed.
The status of main MG manual interruption mode is not stored when the machine is turned off,
so that the main MG manual interruption is turned off when the machine is turned on again.

The MG manual operation interruption cannot be turned off while the MG is rotating. MG man-
ual interruption mode is turned off when the interruption ON/OFF select SW is turned off after
the MG stops rotating.

(2) MG Manual Rotation

The magazine can be manually rotated by using the MG panel when the “MG manual interrup-
tion mode is turned on” and “MG door is closed”. The key operation made on the MG panel is
ignored and the magazine does not rotate when the “MG door is not closed” even if the “MG
manual interruption mode is turned on”.

Although the “MG door is unlocked” when the “MG manual interruption mode is turned on”, the
“MG door is locked” while the magazine is rotating.

[Supplement]

The manual rotation is not accepted unless the following conditions for rotating the magazine are
met.
• The MG door is closed.
• The ready station is positioned at the “RS MG position” and “RS tool extraction position”
 5262-E P-52
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(3) Emergency Stop

This button functions in the same way as the emergency stop button on the operation panel and
machine panel.

Magazine Manual Interruption

Manual Interruption

OFF ON

Manual Interruption

OFF ON

Door Interlock

Restart

Emergency Stop

LE32114R0100400600001
 5262-E P-53
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

4-1-3. Magazine Door

The interlock functions related to magazine door operation are described below.
The magazine door is locked by the electromagnetic lock in the following statuses and thus it cannot
be opened.

• During ATC operation

• During magazine rotation

• In the magazine manual operation intervention mode OFF state

• NC is running.

Even under these statuses, the electromagnetic lock does not lock the magazine door in the follow-
ing cases.

• In the machine lock state

• Magazine door open signal is OFF.

• Alarm message “Please open the magazine door” is displayed.

When the magazine door is not closed

(1) Any of following operation or command causes an alarm.

• Jog switch or pulse handle operation to feed an axis

• Rotation or inching operation of the spindle, sub-spindle and the M-tool spindle

• Turret indexing operation

• Axis feed commands

• Rotation or orientation command of the spindle, sub-spindle and the M-tool spindle

• C-axis connection command

• Turret index command

(2) An alarm occurs if ATC operation is attempted.

• Manual ATC operation

• ATC command (MT, M06, M228 or MG command)

(3) Although manual ATC operation is enabled by the setting at the “MACHINE SYSTEM PARAM-
ETER” screen, starting manual ATC operation causes an alarm.

(4) Manual turret tool mounting/removal operation is permitted by pressing the [MANUAL TOOL
EXCHANGE] key.
If the [MANUAL TOOL EXCHANGE] key is pressed when the M-tool spindle is unclamped, an
alarm will occur in response to the execution of the M-tool spindle orientation which is initiated
by the pressing of the [MANUAL TOOL EXCHANGE] key.
 5262-E P-54
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

4-1-4. Mounting/Removing a tool Manually

To manually mount or remove a tool at the pot indexed to the manual tool mounting/removal posi-
tion, follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Move the ZA-axis to the work position using the machine operation panel at the front of the
machine.

2 Set the magazine manual operation intervention mode using the magazine operation panel at
the rear of the machine.

3 Index the tool to be changed to the manual tool mounting/removal position.

4 Open the magazine door after the magazine has stopped.

5 Mount/remove a tool using a special jig.

6 Close the magazine door and set the magazine manual operation intervention mode OFF.
 5262-E P-55
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

4-2. Manual ATC Operation

The manual ATC operation can be done by pressing the ATC key in the function selection keys on
the additional panel. The turret tool can be manually changed using the tool mount/dismount com-
mand, turret tool clamp and turret tool unclamp keys.

ATC key in the function selection Keys

LE32114R0100400140001

LE32114R0100400140002
 5262-E P-56
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(1) Turret Indexing

The turret can be indexed in either of the two positions; ATC position and cutting position. When
the turret is indexed by using the TURRET INDEX key after selecting “INDEX TO ATC POSI-
TION” or INDEX TO CUTTING POSITION, the turret index status is changed. Although the
indexing status of the cutting position indexing reference point is similar to the ATC position
indexing, the turret must be in the ATC position indexing status while the ATC cycle is in pro-
cess. Therefore, care the difference when operating the ATC.

INDEX ATC POS: When the TURRET CCW key is pressed, the turret is indexed to the ATC
position.
INDEX CUT POS: The turret rotates in the selected direction that corresponds to the NOR-
MAL or REVERSE and the turret is indexed to the cutting position.

(2) Manual Operation

When the RESET button on the operation panel is pressed while the ATC command is exe-
cuted, the ATC operation stops while the operation output corresponding to the output logic
table for the ATC sequence is made. To restore the ATC operation, the machine must enter
manual operation mode and return to the state before executing the ATC operation by pressing
the 1-STEP ADVANCE or 1-STEP REVERSE button.

1-CYCLE START button

A series of tool change operation is executed between the tool in the magazine pot indexed to
the ATC position and the tool in the turret indexed to the ATC position. The tool change opera-
tion pauses while preparing the next tool if the 1-CYCLE START button is pressed without exe-
cuting the ATC position indexing and tool change position determination for the turret to
change.

1-STEP ADVANCE button

The ATC operation sequence is executed step by step each time this button is pressed. The
machine moves to the next step unless the current sequence operation is completed. Each
sequence operation can be only if all of conditions shown in the input logic table are met.

1-STEP REVERSE button

The ATC operation sequence is executed step by step in the reverse order each time this but-
ton is pressed. The 1 step reverse cannot be executed in the ATC operation sequence 1.

INTERLOCK RELEASE button

This button is used to restore the ATC operation if it has been stooped halfway due to occur-
rence of an alarm.

(3) Shutter Open/Close

Manually open or close the shutter provided between the machine and the ATC.

SHUTTER OPEN : The shutter opens.

SHUTTER CLOSE : The shutter closes.

[Supplement]

Shutter operation (opening/closing) is disabled in the following cases and operation of the shutter
switches is disregarded.
• The tool change arm is not at the EA rotation position A or C
 5262-E P-57
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

[Supplement]

When the ATC operation sequence is executed in the state the shutter is opened by the shutter
open switch or when the shutter is opened then closed by the shutter open and close switches in
the state the shutter is open during the execution of ATC operation sequence, the shutter will not
be closed in later ATC operation sequence even if the sequence includes shutter close operation.
To close the shutter in such state, use the CLOSE switch.

(4) Manual Tool Change for Turret-Mounted Tools

LE32114R0100400140003

The tool can be mounted or dismounted to the turret in manual mount/dismount mode when
manually changing the tool mounted to the turret without changing the ATC.

Procedure :

1 Index the turret to the ATC position or BA = 0°.

2 Select the manual operation mode and close the front door.

3 Press the Manual tool change request key. The M-tool spindle stops at the home position and
the axis is clamped. In this case, the LED in the Manual tool change request key blinks.

4 When manual tool change mode is selected, the LED in the Manual tool change ON key lights.

5 Press the Turret tool unclamp key. The tool inserted into the turret is clamped.

6 Insert a new tool into the turret and press the turret tool clamp key to clamp the tool.

7 Press the Manual tool change request key again. This cancels the manual tool change mode
and the LED in the key turns off.

8 Select the tool data setting mode and enter the tool data of the newly mounted tool. This oper-
ation must be executed.
 5262-E P-58
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

[Supplement]

Manual tool change mode cannot be established even if the Manual tool change request key is
pressed unless the following conditions are satisfied.
• The spindle is stopped.
• The rotary tool is stopped.
• The turret is not rotating.

[Supplement]

While in the manual tool change mode, following manual operations are disregarded.
• Spindle rotation
• Rotary tool rotation
• Other ATC manual operations
• Turret rotation
 5262-E P-59
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

5. ATC Program Commands

5-1. ATC Commands

The ATC commands are explained below. Those in ( ) are for the OSP capable of managing 200
sets of tool data (optional). When handling 200 sets of tool data, specify a tool number and a tool off-
set number in three digits.

(1) MT = **∆∆...................Next tool preparation command (MT = ‘‘‘∆∆)

The tool designated by the tool number ‘‘(or ‘‘‘) is indexed by the magazine and is set in
the ready station as the next tool. The turret station number ∆∆ is retained until the M06 com-
mand is designated next.

(2) TC = ∆∆...................Turret index to the ATC position command

The command indexes the turret, specified by ∆∆, to the ATC position.

(3) M06...................Tool change command

The command exchanges the tool indexed to the turret ATC position with the tool prepared at
the ready station. The tool removed from the turret is returned to the magazine.

(4) TL = **{{...................Tool number index command (TL = ‘‘‘{{{)

The command rotates the turret to index the specified turret-mounted tool to the cutting posi-
tion.
: Nose R compensation number
{{: Tool offset number
(Optional specification)
For the 200-pair tool management specification, the nose R compensation number must be the
same number as the tool offset number. It is not allowed to designate different numbers. The
command for indexing the turret to the position vertical to the cutting position is as indicated
below.
TL = **{{ BT = 1

(5) M228...................Tool return command

The command returns the tool prepared as the next tool to the magazine.

(6) MG = {{...................Magazine index command

The command rotates the magazine to index the magazine pot specified by {{ to the ATC
position.

(7) G21 HP = “1“...................ATC position return command

(the command for moving the turret to the tool change position)
The command is used to move the turret to the tool change position. If the tool change position
is other than “Y = 0”, designate the G21 command in the Y-axis mode.
 5262-E P-60
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(8) M204/M205...................Shutter close/open command

These commands close and open the shutter provided between the machining area of the
machine and the ATC.
Shutter close operation is disabled in the following cases and execution of the shutter close
command in these statuses causes an alarm and the following alarm message is displayed.
Alarm A 1807 Shutter close impossible

• The tool change arm is not located in EA retract position A or EA retract position B.

• (Actual X-axis position of the turret) >

(X-axis travel limit in the positive direction (system parameter setting))

[Supplement]

When the ATC operation sequence is executed in the state the shutter is opened by the shutter
open command or when the shutter is closed then opened by the shutter open and close com-
mands in the state the shutter is open during the execution of ATC operation sequence, the shut-
ter will not be closed in later ATC operation sequence even if the sequence includes shutter close
operation.
To close the shutter in such state, use the shutter close command.
Examples:
• Executing an ATC operation sequence in the state the shutter is open by the execution of the
M205 command.
→ The shutter is not closed even if a step where the shutter should be closed is executed.
• Executing an ATC operation sequence continuously by once closing/opening the shutter by
executing the M204/M205 command after the shutter was opened by the ATC operation
sequence.
→ The shutter is not closed even if a step where the shutter should be closed is executed.

(9) M227...................ATC operating completion wait command

Among ATC operation steps, the next tool preparation operation and the tool return operation
can be executed independent of the operation of the machine. Accordingly, the answer signal
is returned immediately when the MT command is executed, and for the M06 command, the
answer signal is returned when the ATC operation sequence reaches the tool return cycle start
state. This means that the command specified following the MT or M06 command can be exe-
cuted simultaneously with the ATC operation. However, if the operation to be executed next to
the M06 command is opening the front door, the front door must be opened only after the com-
pletion of all ATC operations to ensure safety.
Therefore, the command that suspends front door opening operation until the completion of
ATC operations is provided.
When the M227 command is specified in the block next to the one containing the MT or M06
command, the commands specified following M227 are executed only after all ATC operations
have been completed.

(10) M08/M09...................Turret coolant ON/OFF

The command automatically recognizes the turret station indexed to the cutting position (base
cutting position, vertical cutting position, B-axis cutting position) and supplies turret coolant from
the coolant discharge position of that turret station. If the turret is indexed to the ATC position or
when the turret index operation has not been completed, coolant is not supplied even if the tur-
ret coolant ON command is executed.
 5262-E P-61
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

5-2. ATC Macro Commands

Positioning to the tool change position can be executed by specifying an ATC macro command
G171.
Macro M code, M421 that includes both G171 and M06 can execute positioning to the tool change
position and tool change cycle by a single command.

(1) G171_ATP = “1”...................Command for positioning at tool change position

(“_” represents a space.)
The command includes the following three operations.
Indexing turret station “1” into the ATC position
Y-axis mode ON
Positioning of the turret to the tool change position, corresponding to the selected tool type
(station “1”), by the “G21 HP = “1” “ command
After the execution of this command, the Y-axis mode is turned ON.
To index the turret to the ATC position by the “G171 ATP = ∆∆” command, the turret must be at
the variable limit in the positive direction. If the turret is not at the variable limit in the positive
direction when this command is executed, the turret remains in the operating status since the
turret cannot be indexed.

(2) G171_AHP = ...................Command for positioning at tool change position

The command includes the following three operations.
Y-axis mode ON
Positioning of the turret to the tool change position, corresponding to “AHP = “, by the
“G21 HP = “ command.
Y-axis mode OFF if “AHP = 4”
After the execution of “G171 AHP = 1, 2”, the machine is in the Y-axis mode.
After the execution of “G171 AHP = 4”, the Y-axis mode is OFF.

(3) M421...................Positioning at tool change position/Tool change/Positioning at return position

The command includes the following six operations.
Indexing the turret station ∆∆ to the ATC position according to the MT command executed
before M421.
Y-axis mode ON
Positioning of the turret to the tool change position, corresponding to the selected tool type
(station ∆∆), by the “G21 HP = “ command
Tool change
Executing “G21 HP = 4” (After the execution of tool change operation, the turret always
returns to the return position “4”)
Y-axis mode OFF
For the execution of M421, two conditions indicated below must be satisfied.
a) The MT command has been executed.
b) The turret is at the variable limit in the positive direction (X-axis), or the turret is indexed to
the ATC position.
If the M421 command is executed although these conditions are not satisfied, an alarm occurs.
Alarm B 2288 User reserve code
If the NC is reset after the execution of an MT command, execute the MT command again
before M421.
 5262-E P-62
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

[Supplement]

Since G171 and M421 commands are macro commands, these commands call the correspond-
ing macro subprograms from the operation area of the NC memory and execute them. There-
fore, designation of these ATC macro commands is not allowed unless the corresponding macro
subprograms are stored in the operation area of the NC memory.
Macro subprograms are automatically registered to the operation area of the NC memory when
the operation mode is switched to the automatic operation mode for the first time after turning on
the power.
To execute G171 or M421 immediately after turning on the power, change the operation mode to
the automatic mode before executing them.
For details of subprograms called by the execution of G171 or M421, refer to 11-3 “ATC Macro
Command Subprograms”.

5-3. Others
(1) The A turret rotates when the following conditions are satisfied.

a. (Saddle YS-axis positioning position) ≥ (Spindle center line position set for system parame-
ter)

b. The X- and Z-axis positions of the saddle satisfy the following relationship.
(Variable limits of X/Z in the positive direction) ≤ (Saddle X/Z-axis positioning position)
≤ (Travel end limit of X/Z-axis)

(2) An alarm occurs if the turret is rotated in the state the tool change arm is in the machine.

[Supplement]

The state “the tool change arm is in the machine” means the following state.
The tool change arm rotation status is not the EA rotation retraction position.

(3) If the RESET button on the machine operation panel is pressed during the execution of an ATC
command, ATC operation stops in the state the operation signals are output according to the
ATC sequence output logic at the moment the RESET button is pressed.
To restore the ATC operation, select the manual mode and return the ATC to the state before
the execution of ATC operation using the 1 STEP ADVANCE and 1 STEP REVERSE buttons.
 5262-E P-63
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

5-4. Example Programs

5-4-1. For the Model without Tool Life Management Specification

Return position : HP = 4
L-tool number : 3, 4
M-tool number : 11, 12
Example 1:

N001 M03 S500 M42

N002 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position
N003 MT = 0401 Tool preparation command
(04 ..... Tool number)
N004 G171 ATP =1 Turret rotation and positioning at the tool change position
N005 M06 Tool change command
N006 MT =0301 Tool preparation command
(03 ..... Tool number)
N007 G171 AHP =4 Travel to return position
N008 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position
N009 TL = 040404 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N010 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process

N021 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N022 G171 ATP =1 Turret rotation and positioning at the tool change position
N023 M06 Tool change command
(03 ..... Tool number)
N024 G171 AHP =4 Travel to return position

N025 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N026 TL =030303 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N027 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process

N041 G00 X5000 Z400 Turret rotation position

N042 MT =1103 Tool preparation command
(11 ..... Tool number)
N043 G171 ATP =1 turret rotation and positioning at the tool change position
N044 M06 Tool change position

N045 G171 ATP =4 Travel to return position

N046 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position
N047 TL =111111 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N048 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start, shutter close
M049 MT = 1201 Tool preparation command
(12 ..... Tool number)
Program for milling process

:
N999 M02
LE32114R0100400250001
 5262-E P-64
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Example 2:

N001 M03 S500 M42

N002 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position
N003 MT = 0401 Tool preparation command
(04 ..... Tool number)
N004 M421 ATC macro command (Tool No. 04 change)
N005 MT =0301 Tool preparation command
(03 ..... Tool number)
N006 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position
N007 TL =040404 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N008 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process

N021 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N022 M421 ATC macro command (Tool No. 03 change)
N023 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position
N024 TL =030303 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N025 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process

N041 G00 X5000 Z400 Turret rotation position

N042 MT =1101 Tool preparation command
(11 ..... Tool number)
N043 M421 ATC macro command (Tool No. 11 change)
N044 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N045 TL =111111 Indexing the turret to the cutting position

N046 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start, shutter close
N047 MT =1201 Tool preparation command
(12 ..... Tool number)

Program for milling process

:
N999 M02
LE32114R0100400250002

[Supplement]

In Example 2:
If tool No. 11 is already mounted in turret station, the following commands are ignored and the
operation proceeds to N044 and on.
N042 MT=1101
N043 M421
In other words, execution of the next tool preparation command MT and the ATC macro com-
mand M421 is completed without actual processing if the tool specified by the next tool prepara-
tion command MT is always mounted in the specified turret station.
 5262-E P-65
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

5-4-2. For the Model with Tool Life Management Specification

Return position : HP = 4
L-tool number : 3, 4
M-tool number : 5, 6
Example 3:

N001 TLID
N002 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position
N003 TG = 04 MT = 01 Tool preparation command
(The MT command must always be specified in
MT=00 ** )
N004 G070 ATP =1 Positioning at the tool change position
N005 M06 Tool change command
N006 TG =03 MT =01 Tool preparation command
N007 G171 AHP =4
N008 G00 X5000 Z400
N009 TG = 04 OG = 01 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N010 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process

N021 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N022 G171 ATP =1 Positioning at the tool change position
N023 M06 Tool change command
N024 G171 AHP =4
N025 G00 X5000 Z400
N026 TG = 03 OG = 01 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N027 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process

N041 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N042 TG = 05 MT =01 Tool preparation command
N043 G171 ATP =3
N044 M06 Tool change command
N045 G171 AHP =4
N046 G00 X5000 Z400
N047 TG = 05 OG = 01 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N048 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start
M049 TG = 06 MT = 01 Tool preparation command

Program for milling process

:
N999 M02
LE32114R0100400260001

[Supplement]

For the tool life management specification, designate a TG command (tool group number com-
mand) with the MT command in the same block. In this case, designate “00” for the tool number
of the MT command.
 5262-E P-66
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Example 4:

N001 TLID
N002 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position
N003 TG = 04 MT = 01 Tool preparation command
(The MT command must always be specified in
MT=00 ** )
N004 M421 ATC macro command
N005 TG =03 MT =01 Tool preparation command
N006 G00 X5000 Z400
N007 TG =04 OG =01 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N008 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process

N021 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N022 M421 ATC macro command
N023 G00 X5000 Z400
N024 TG =03 OG =01 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N025 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process

N041 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N042 TG = 05 MT =01 Tool preparation command
N043 M421 ATC macro command
N044 G00 X5000 Z400
N045 TG =05 OG =01 Indexing the turret to the cutting position
N046 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start
N047 TG = 06 MT = 01 Tool preparation command

Program for milling process

:
N999 M02
LE32114R0100400260002

[Supplement]

In Example 4:
If a tool of tool group number 5 is already mounted in turret station, the following commands are
ignored and the operation proceeds to N044 and on.
N042 TG=05 MT=01
N043 M421
In other words, execution of the next tool preparation command MT and the ATC macro com-
mand M421 is completed without actual processing if the tool belonging to the tool group speci-
fied by the next tool preparation command MT is always mounted in the specified turret station.
 5262-E P-67
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

6. Automatic Operation
For details of operating procedure in the automatic operation mode, refer to the Operation Manual
for OSP-E100L.
This section deals with the operation procedure of the functions specific to the ATC specification.

6-1. Sequence Return Procedure

The sequence return function allows the automatic operation, interrupted due to resetting or emer-
gency stop, to restart from the sequence one block before the sequence where the operation was
interrupted.
Among the ATC related commands, the commands indicated below do not execute ATC operation
even if a sequence return is executed.

• MT command

• MG command

• M204/M205 command

• M06 command

• M228 command

Operation example:

OSHT1
N0100 G171 AHP =4
N0101 G50 S3500
N0102 G97 S500 M41 M03 M08
N0103 M205 MT = 2001
N0104 G171 ATP =1 To execute sequence return from N0107:
N0105 M06 Operation restarts from sequence N0106.
When restarting the operation from
NAT20 TL =202020 sequence N0106, the tool of tool No. 20
must be in the turret. Therefore, this tool
must be mounted in the turret before the
N0106 G00 X250 Z200 operation is restarted.
N0107 Z150.5
N0108 MT = 3001
LE32114R0100400280001
 5262-E P-68
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Procedure :

1 Mount No. 20 tool in the turret.

Select the MDI mode and execute the following.
[M], [T], [=], [2], [0], [0], [1], [WRITE][START]
[F1] (DATA INPUT), [T], [C], [=], [1], [WRITE][START]
[F1] (DATA INPUT), [M], [0], [6], [WRITE][START]

2 Check the actual ATC sequence number by displaying the ATC STATUS DISPLAY screen of
the check data in the automatic, MDI or manual mode (Refer to Section 8 “ATC Status Dis-
play”.)
If the sequence number is not “1”, return the actual ATC operation sequence number to “1” by
manually operating the ATC.

3 Execute the sequence restart operation by selecting the automatic mode.

 5262-E P-69
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

6-2. Cautions on Using the Program Check/Graphic Scale Automatic

Setting Function while in Machine Lock Status
Cautions to be paid for using the program check and the graphic scale automatic setting functions
while the machine lock function is ON are shown below.
Machining may be carried out in two modes - to carry out machining by changing the tool mounted
in the turret using the ATC and to carry out machining by selecting the tool with the TL command
(TG/OG command of the tool life management specification) from the turret-mounted tools.
In either case, although it is possible to check the program in the machine lock status, the following
points must be taken into consideration on using the TL command (or TG/OG command).
Operation example:

OSHT2
N0100 G00 X500 Z500
N0101 G50 S3500
N0102 G97 S500 M41 M03 M08
NAT20 TL = 202020 The program shows the case - No. 20 tool is
already mounted in the turret (T3 station) and
N0106 G00 X250 Z200 tool change by ATC is not necessary.
Since the program itself is correct, actual
N0107 Z150.5 machining can be executed without problems.
N0108 MT = 3001 However, when checking the program, an alarm
occurs at the sequence including the TL
command due to the machine lock function if
NC program using No. 20 tool the tool of No. 20 tool is not mounted in the
turret.

LE32114R0100400290001

If the example program above is checked in the machine lock status, in the status No. 20 tool is not
mounted in the turret, an alarm occurs (Alarm B ATC TL).
This is because the same alarm (Alarm B ATC TL) also occurs if machining is started immediately
after resetting the alarm state, making machining impossible.
To execute program check, follow either of the procedure indicated below:

• Mount No. 20 tool to the turret before turning the machine lock function on, then execute pro-
gram check.
 5262-E P-70
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

• Set the initial status of the tool mounted in the turret, for the program to be checked, at the ATC
TOOL INFORMATION screen (refer to “Tool Information”) before turning on the machine lock
function, then execute program check.

For the example program shown in the previous page, set the tool data of the turret mounted tool
(No. 20 tool) for T3 before turning on the machine lock function. After that turn on the machine lock
function and execute program check.
(After finishing program check, return the setting to the previous state.)

LE32114R0100400290002

[Supplement]

When TG/OG command provided for the tool life management specification is used, an alarm
occurs (Alarm B 2411 TOOL LIFE CONTROL tool group). In this case follow the same steps as
indicated above.
When the automatic tool layout function or the automatic scale setting function of the graphic
function is used, an alarm also occurs if the program is made in the same manner as shown in the
example program. Take the same steps as indicated above to avoid the occurrence of an alarm.
 5262-E P-71
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

7. Data Setting

7-1. Magazine Information

If a tool is manually mounted to the magazine, it is necessary to set the data of the mounted tool at
the ATC MAGAZINE INFORMATION screen in the tool data setting mode. Tool change using the
ATC is not possible unless the tool data is set correctly.

LE32114R0100400300001

Data Setting Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the tool data setting mode.

2 Select the ATC MAGAZINE INFORMATION screen by pressing the function key [F6] (ITEM ↑)
or [F7] (ITEM↓), or pressing [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).

3 Locate the cursor on the magazine pot number for which the tool data is set.

4 Press the function key [F1] (SET).

 5262-E P-72
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

5 Set the tool data according to the format below.

(A),(B),(C) [WRITE]
(A) Tool number
(B) Tool kind (L-tool/M-tool/Sensor)
(C) Tool size/weight

• Tool No.
Set a number in the range of 0 to 96. Since “0” represents “no tool”, if you set “0” for the
magazine number for which the data has already been set, the data is deleted. (If “0” is
set, setting is not necessary for tool kind and tool size/weight.)
The magazine pots arranged before and after the pot storing a large-diameter tool are
treated as a dummy pot and “D” is displayed for such pots at the TOOL NO. column.

• Tool kind
To designate a tool kind, enter the following codes.
L: Turning tool
M: Milling tool
S: Sensor
If no tool kind is set although a tool number is set, the tool is recognized as a dummy tool
and “DT” is displayed.

• Tool size/weight
For the standard sized tools and dummy tools, it is not necessary to set the size data.
Select the identifier in the manner indicated below.
[B]: L-large diameter
[BR]: R-large diameter tool
[E]: Super-large diameter tool
[H]: Heavy tool
[SL]: Large diameter tool (MULTUS-B300/B400 only)
Note L-large, R-large, super-large diameter and large diameter tools are all handles as a
heavy tool. For the standard tools are dummy tools, designation of tool size/weight is not
necessary.
Note L-large, R-large and super-large diameter tools are all handled as a heavy tool.
For the standard tools and dummy tools, designation of tool size/weight is not necessary.
If L-large, R-large, or super-large diameter is designated, identifier “D” that represents a
dummy pot is set to the TOOL No. column at the preceding and/or succeeding magazine
pot according to the tool size. Therefore, if tool data is already set for the magazine pot
which should be set as a dummy tool, designation of a large-diameter tool is not possible.
Conversely, setting of the tool information is not allowed for the dummy pot.
 5262-E P-73
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Reserved Pots
When a super-large, left-large, or right-large diameter tool is removed from the magazine pot and
mounted in the turret, the pot where such a tool was stored is recognized as a reserved pot (the pot
reserved for returning the same tool). Therefore, no tools other than the one previously stored can-
not be returned to the reserved pot.
At the ATC MAGAZINE INFORMATION screen, identifier “R” is displayed at the TOOL No. column
of the reserved pot.

[Supplement]

To cancel the designation of a reserved pot, set “0” at the TOOL No. column of the corresponding
pot by following the steps indicated in item (1) “Data Setting Procedure”.
Delete the data of the super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool, which has been mounted to
the turret by the ATC, at the ATC TOOL INFORMATION screen described in 7-2 “Tool Informa-
tion”, and the reserved pot designation is automatically canceled.
Designation for a reserved pot is automatically made during tool change operation. Therefore,
when returning a super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool for which the reserved pot designa-
tion has been canceled to the magazine, the ATC searches and returns the tool to an empty pot.

LE32114R0100400300002
 5262-E P-74
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

7-2. Tool Information

In the tool data setting mode, the information related to the tools mounted in the turret should be
designated. When a tool is mounted in the turret using the ATC, the corresponding data is automat-
ically set. However, if a tool is mounted to the turret manually, the tool information must be set man-
ually.

LE32114R0100400310001

Setting Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the tool data setting mode.

2 Select the ATC TOOL INFORMATION screen by pressing the function key [F6] (ITEM ↑) or
[F7] (ITEM↓), or pressing [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).

3 Move the cursor to the turret number for which the tool data is set.

4 Set the tool data in the same manner as a magazine tool.

Setting or Altering the Large-diameter Tool Data

• When the tool data is deleted at the ATC TOOL INFORMATION screen for the super-large, L-
large or R-large diameter tool, after mounting it from the magazine to the turret, the reserved
pot designation of the corresponding pot is automatically canceled.

• For the super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool, mounted to the turret by ATC, it is not pos-
sible to alter the data at the ATC TOOL INFORMATION screen. Delete the data once and set
the desired data after that. Or, cancel the reserved pot designation for that tool and then alter
the tool data.

• When a super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool, manually mounted to the turret, is
returned to the magazine using the ATC, the ATC searches and returns the tool to an empty
pot.
 5262-E P-75
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

8. ATC Status Display

When operating the ATC in the automatic, MDI or manual mode, the ATC status and the EC input/
output signal status can be checked by displaying the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY, MACHINE DIAG-
NOSIS, I/O CHECK and other screens.
ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen: Displays the overall ATC operation status.
ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen: Displays the status of the following devices used for the
(Page 2) ATC.
Input status: proximity switches, limit switches, operation panel switches
and keys
Output status: solenoid valves

8-1. ATC Status Display Screen

Displaying Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the automatic, MDI or manual mode.

2 Press the function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY
screen. The ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen consists of two pages, which can be switched
using the PAGE key.
To display the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen (2/2), select “ATC Individual operation”
with the machine system parameter “System check mode” on the SYSTEM CHECK MODE
screen.

ATC Status Display Screen (1/2)

LE32114R0100400330001
 5262-E P-76
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Displayed information:
ATC SEQ. NO : Displays the current ATC operation sequence number.
MG ATC POS. POT NO. : Displays the magazine pot number indexed to the ATC position.
ATC POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the magazine pot indexed to the ATC
position.
RS NEXT TOOL : Displays the data of the tool which has been stored in the ready
station and will be mounted in the turret.
RETURN TOOL : Displays the data of the tool which has been removed from the
turret by ATC and stored in the ready station, and will be
returned to the magazine.
TURRET ATC POS. NO. : Displays the turret station number indexed to the ATC position.
ATC POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the turret station indexed to the ATC
position.
CUT POS. NO. : Displays the turret station number indexed to the cutting posi-
tion.
CUT POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the turret station indexed to the cutting
position.
NEXT TOOL COM. MT= : Displays the content of the command specified for preparation
of the next tool.
MG PANEL STATUS : Displays the communication status between CNC and the mag-
azine panel.
ACTUAL POSITION : Display the actual position (in machine coordinate system) of
the tool in turret A.
ATC START : Lights when the ATC is ready to execute MT command or M06
command.
MACTURN30 ... ATC sequence No. 1, 11
MACTURN50 ... ATC sequence No. 1, 8
ATC CYCLE ST. : Lights when the ATC cycle is in progress.
TURRET INDEX : Lights when the turret A can rotate.
NG PANEL INT. : Lights when the manual intervention is selected on the maga-
zine panel.
 5262-E P-77
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

ATC Status Display Screen (2/2)

MACTURN 30

LE32114R0100400330002

This above screen allows you to check individual ATC operation commands and ATC operation sta-
tuses with lamp indication.
Normally, the STATUS lamp and the corresponding COMMAND lamp are in the same status. How-
ever, mismatch will occur if the ATC operation is disabled for some reason.

8-2. Tool Data Display Screen

Even when an operation mode is selected, it is allowed to display the tool data in the same manner
as in the tool data setting mode.
Since the screen is provided for simply checking the set data, the screen cannot be used to alter the
set data. To alter the set data, select the tool data setting mode.
The information displayed at the screen is the same as the information at the screen displayed in the
tool data setting mode.

Displaying Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the automatic, MDI or manual mode.

2 Press the function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the screen menu.

3 Select a desired screen from the screen menu. If a screen consists of several pages, select a
desired screen page using the PAGE keys.
 5262-E P-78
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

8-3. Machine Diagnosis Screen

If the ATC or the magazine stops due to unsatisfied machine conditions, such conditions can be
checked on the diagnosis screen.
If some conditions are missing in ATC sequence operation or magazine operation, the diagnosis
screen shows the cause.

Display procedure

Procedure :

1 Select any of AUTO, MDI, or MANUAL mode.

2 Press the function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the diagnosis screen.

3 If the screen consists of several pages, select a required page.

Machine Diagnosis Screen

LE32114R0100400350001

The following diagnosis messages are displayed.

“10403 MG Manual Interruption OFF is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the magazine manual interruption is
not turned on.

“10414 Ready Station Magazine position LS is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station magazine position
confirmation is not turned on.

“10420 Shutter Open LS is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ATC shutter open confirmation
input is not turned on.
 5262-E P-79
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

“10419 Shutter Close LS is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ATC shutter close confirmation
input is not turned on.

“10421 Turret ATC Position Indexing Completion is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret indexing angle is not posi-
tioned at the ATC position during the turret rotation.

“10422 Turret Tool Change Position 2 is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret are
not set to the tool change position.

The tool change position can be set since the turret may index several stations. This message indi-
cates that positions of X/Y/Z axes of the turret are not set to the registered tool change positions for
each station.

“10423 Turret Tool Change Position 1 is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret are
not set to the tool change positions.

This message indicates that positions of X/Y/Z axes of the turret are not set to the registered tool
change position for the indexed station. However, only one station and one tool change position are
available since MULTUS-B300 is equipped with the H1 turret. Therefore, this message indicates
that the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret are not set to the tool change positions.

“10424 Turret Tool is not clamped.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret tool is not clamped.

“10425 Turret Tool is not unclamped.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret tool is not unclamped.

“10426 M-tool spindle Indexing is not completed.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the M-tool spindle of the H1 turret is
not indexed to the angle where the tool is changed.

“10427 Magazine Indexing Match is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the magazine indexing is not com-
pleted.

“10430 Tool Change Arm Movement to the advance position is not completed.”
This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm is not moved to
the tool arm tool extract position due to the movement of the tool change arm axis (EZ axis).

“10431 Tool Change Arm Movement to the retract position is not completed.”
This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm is not moved to
the tool arm tool insert position due to the movement of the tool change arm axis (EZ axis).

“10437 With MG Tool is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool is
mounted to the magazine is turned on.

“10436 Without MG Tool is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool is
mounted to the magazine is turned off.
 5262-E P-80
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

“10448 Ready Station Magazine position LS is not turned off.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station magazine position
confirmation is not turned off.

“10456 Ready Station Change position LS is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station change position
confirmation is not turned on.

“10458 Ready Station tool extraction is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool extraction posi-
tion confirmation is not turned on.

“10461 With Turret Tool is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool is
mounted to the turret is turned on.

“10472 Ready Station Change position LS is not turned off.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station change position
confirmation is not turned off.

“10481 Ready Station tool insertion is not turned on.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool insertion is not
turned on.

“10483 Ready Station tool insertion is not turned off.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool insertion posi-
tion confirmation is not turned off.

“10484 Ready Station tool extraction is not turned off.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool extraction posi-
tion confirmation is not turned on.

“10940 Tool Lock for the Tool Change Arm is not turned on.”
This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool lock confirmation for the tool
change arm is not turned on.

“10941 Tool Unlock for the Tool Change Arm is not turned on.”
This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool unlock confirmation for the
tool change arm is not turned on.

“10947 Tool Lock for the Tool Change Arm is turned on.”
This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool lock confirmation for the tool
change arm is turned on.

“10948 Tool Unlock for the Tool Change Arm is turned on.”
This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool unlock confirmation for the
tool change arm is turned on.

“10949 Shutter Open EA Rotation is not turned on.”

The ATC shutter of MULTUS-B300 is equipped with the input for checking the “position where the
tool change arm can enter into the machine with rotation”. If the confirmation input is not turned on,
the ATC unit cannot operate.

“10950 Tool Change Arm RS movement is not completed.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EZ axis) is not
positioned to the tool change arm RS position.
 5262-E P-81
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

“10952 EA Rotation Position A movement is not completed.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is not
positioned to the tool change arm 0° position with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10953 EA Rotation Position B movement is not completed.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is not
positioned to the tool change arm 90° position with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10954 EA Rotation Position C movement is not completed.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is not
positioned to the tool change arm 180° with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10955 EA Rotation Position D movement is not completed.”

This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is not
positioned to the tool change arm 270° position with the tool arm axis rotation.

8-4. ATC Input/Output Display Screen

With the I/O monitor function, the I/O CHECK screen shows the ON/OFF status of the input/output
signals of the ATC operation panel and the ATC unit.
See Appendix for the ATC input/output bit tables.
 5262-E P-82
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

9. Parameter Setting
Setting of the parameters used for controlling the ATC can be changed by selecting the parameter
setting mode. To display the desired parameter, follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Select the parameter setting mode.

2 Select the page that contains the desired parameter by pressing function key [F6] (ITEM↑) and
[F7] (ITEM↓).

9-1. ATC Tool Change Position and Movable Range

The ATC tool change position and the axis movable range are set for the parameters by the coordi-
nate values in the machine coordinate system.
Since the most appropriate values are set for these parameters before shipping, the setting must not
be changed.

ATC POS:
P1: Tool change position

RETURN POS.
When tool change cycle is executed, an axis may move beyond the axis travel range set for machin-
ing. Therefore, turret rotation is not allowed at the ATC position.
Concerning the Y-axis, it must be returned to the spindle center line position since it may move to a
position off the spindle center position.
In such cases, axis movements are controlled using RETURN POS. 4 and 5.
The ATC macro command M421 moves the turret to the return position 4 after the completion of tool
change operation.
For the YS-axis, set the data so that it will be at the spindle center position set for the system param-
eter.

G21 RANGE:
The data sets the axis movable range for the operation to return to the home position called by G21.
The axes can move beyond the range set by the variable limit setting data as long as they move
within the range set by these parameters. Concerning the Z-axis, the range is identical to the range
set by the variable limit setting.
The position number corresponds to P1 - P5 of this parameter.

CAUTION
The axis travel limits in moving to the ATC position set the saddle movable range in the status the
turret is indexed to the ATC position and the shutter is open. The travel end limit data set for the
system parameters sets the range where the saddle can move and the turret can rotate without
interference independent of the status of turret indexing and shutter open/close.
For HP = 4, set the position so that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• The YS-axis position is identical to the spindle center position set for the system parameter.
• The X- and Z-axis positions are within the travel end limits and within the movable range limits.
 5262-E P-83
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

[Supplement]

For the Z-axis position, set the same value as the L-tool change position, the face M-tool change
position or the side M-tool change position to facilitate programming.

9-2. Magazine Axis Parameter

Set the parameters related to magazine control.

(1) Magazine Zero Offset

Set the data for MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET when the magazine position encoder is mounted
for the first time or after changing the magazine position encoder.
Since the data is set before shipping the machine, usually the setting for this parameter is not
necessary. By setting the offset data, the magazine pot number displayed at the ATC CONDI-
TION DISPLAY screen is matched with the actual machine magazine pot number.
Setting procedure
a) Move the cursor to the MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET item.
b) Press function key [F3] (CAL).
c) Input the pot number of the presently indexed magazine pot.
d) Press the [WRITE] key.
With the operation indicated above, the zero offset value is calculated and set.
MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET = (Actual position of position encoder)
- (Magazine pot number of the pot indexed to the ATC position - 1)
×(360° magazine capacity)
If the value obtained by the calculation indicated above is a negative value, the ZERO OFFSET
value is re-calculated by adding 360.

(2) Magazine Backlash

Set the backlash offset value as needed.
Initial value:0
Setting unit:1°

(3) Magazine Droop Amount

Initial value:0.005
Setting unit:1°
 5262-E P-84
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

9-3. EC–axis (Tool Change Arm Rotation Axis) Parameter

Set the parameters related to the EC-axis (tool change arm rotation axis).

(1) Droop Deta

Set the droop data of the tool change arm rotation axis.

(2) Zero Offset

Set the zero offset data of the tool change arm rotation axis.
For the point data (MC SYSTEM PARAMETER: EC POINT), set the value obtained by subtract-
ing the zero offset value from the EC-axis position data (coordinate value in the machine coordi-
nate system).

(3) -/+ Limit

Set the limits of the EC-axis movable range by the coordinate values in the machine coordinate
system. The EC-axis can be moved within the range set by the limit data set for these parame-
ters.
Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the
settings.
Usually, data setting is not necessary.

(4) Backlash
Set the backlash amount of the EC-axis.

(5) Position Encoder Offset

Set the offset amount of the EC-axis position encoder.

9-4. EZ–axis (Tool Change Advance/Retraction Rotation Axis) Parame-

ter (MULTUS-B300/B400)
Set the parameters related to the EZ-axis (tool change arm advance/retraction axis).

(1) Droop Data

Set the droop data of the tool change arm advance/retraction axis.

(2) Zero Offset

Set the zero offset data of the tool change arm advance/retraction axis.
For the point data (MC SYSTEM PARAMETER: EZ POINT), set the value obtained by subtract-
ing the zero offset value from the EZ-axis position data (coordinate value in the machine coordi-
nate system).

(3) -/+ Limit

Set the limits of the EZ-axis movable range by the coordinate values in the machine coordinate
system. The EZ-axis can be moved within the range set by the limit data set for these parame-
ters.
Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the
settings.
Usually, data setting is not necessary.

(4) Backlash
Set the backlash amount of the EZ-axis.

(5) Position Encoder Offset

Set the offset amount of the EZ-axis position encoder.
 5262-E P-85
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

9-5. Positioning Point EC (MULTUS-B300/B400)

Set the positioning points of the EC-axis (tool change arm rotation axis) for tool change operation.
Set the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system by subtracting the zero offset value.
Set the positioning points 1, 2, 3 and 4 to determine the tool change arm rotation positions.ot
EA RET. POS. A 1.POINT
EA CLP. POS. A 2.POINT
EA RET. POS. B 3.POINT
EA CLP. POS. B 4.POINT
Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the set-
tings.
Usually, data setting is not necessary.
Input unit: 1/1000°
Input range: -LIMIT to +LIMIT of ATC PARAMETER (EC)

9-6. Positioning Point EZ (MULTUS-B300/B400)

Set the positioning points of the EZ-axis (tool change arm advance/retraction axis) for tool change
operation.
Set the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system by subtracting the zero offset value.
Set the positioning points 1 and 2 to determine the tool change arm retract and advance positions.
EA RETRACT POS. 1.POINT
EA ADVANCE POS. 2.POINT
Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the set-
tings.
Usually, data setting is not necessary.
Input unit: 1 m
Input range: -LIMIT to +LIMIT of ATC PARAMETER (EZ)

9-7. Turret Index Angle

Set the turret index angles. Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before
shipping, never change the settings. Usually, data setting is not necessary.
No. 1 to No. 4 are used to set the turret index target angle for indexing the turret to the cutting posi-
tion, and No. 13 to No. 16 are used to set the turret index target angle for indexing the turret to the
ATC position.
For H1 turret, the turret angle can be set only at No. 1 to 3 and No. 13.
 5262-E P-86
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

9-8. Magazine Panel Communication Parameter

Set the RS232C device number used for the communication between the CNC and the magazine
panel.For details of the screen below, refer to the Instruction Manual for OSP-E100L.

(1) MG Panel RS232C Device No.

Optional parameter (word) No. 81
Set the device number used for the magazine panel.
Initial value: 1 (CN1:)
Setting range: 0 to 3

(2) Baud rate(bps)

Initial value: 4800
Setting range: 110 to 19200

(3) RS232C stop bit

Initial value: 1
Setting range: 0, 1

(4) RS232C parity bit

Initial value: 1
Setting range: 0, 1

(5) RS232C busy time

Initial value: 5
Setting range: 1 to 99999
 5262-E P-87
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

9-9. Setting the Tool Change Arm Rotation Positions Immediately after
Installing the Control Software (MULTUS-B300/B400)
Immediately after the installation of the control software, the tool change arm rotation mode is indef-
inite, mode A or mode B.
Therefore, it is necessary to determine the tool change arm rotation mode (mode A or mode B) by
setting the tool change arm EC-axis zero offset data and EC-axis positioning point data for points 1
to 4 by selecting the system check mode.
Positioning point setting procedure

Procedure :

1 Position the tool change arm at the retract position or tool clamp position by using the system
check mode.

2 Select the parameter setting mode and display the ATC parameter (EC-axis parameter)
screen.

3 Move the cursor to the ZERO OFFSET column and set the EC-axis zero offset data.
Set the zero offset data so that the positioning point data of the machine system parameter
(EC-axis positioning point) will be as indicated below.
1.POINT 0
2.POINT 90000
3.POINT 180000
4.POINT 270000
If the tool change arm rotation position is at the EA CLP. POS. B, for example, move the cursor
to the ZERO OFFSET column and execute [CAL] + [90] + [WRITE]. The reason for inputting
“90” is that EA CLP. POS. B corresponds to 2.POINT.

4 Display the machine system parameter (EC-axis positioning point) screen in the parameter set-
ting mode.

5 Set the data as follows.

1.POINT 0
2.POINT 90000
3.POINT 180000
4.POINT 270000

6 Turn off the power and turn it on again.

CAUTION
To carry out tool change operation by actually holding a tool by the tool change arm, set the data
for 1.POINT to 4.POINT accurately.
To change the arm rotation position data, always contact Okuma Service Center.
 5262-E P-88
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

9-10. Cam Shaft Timing Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-1)

Set timing of various hydraulic driving controls in relation to the cam shaft angle at ATC sequence
No. 9, for the parameter as angle data.

Angle of turret tool clamp/unclamp

Perform the turret tool clamp/unclamp output operation when the commanded angle of the cam
shaft has entered the following angle range. For the cam shaft angle for clamping/unclamping a tur-
ret tool, override is different between automatic/MDI operation and manual operation. Thus prepare
two sets for automatic/MDI operation and manual operation.
Clamping/unclamping the turret tool and the cam shaft angle have the following relation:

<<Other than 1-step feed/return>>

• Turret tool clamp output

0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Turret tool unclamp start angle
Turret tool clamp start angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

• Turret tool unclamp output

Turret tool unclamp start angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Turret tool clamp start angle

<<Upon 1-step feed/return>>

• Turret tool clamp output

0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 60°
285° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

• Turret tool unclamp output

60° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 285°
Item Initial Value Setting Range
Turret tool clamp start angle 285.000 0 to 359.999
Turret tool unclamp start angle 0.000 0 to 359.999

Angle of RS air blow

Output RS air blow at the following cam shaft angle.

• RS air blow output

RS air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < RS air blow angle 2
Item Initial Value Setting Range
RS air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999
RS air blow angle 2 300.000 0 to 359.999

Angle of ATC air blow

ATC air blow is supplied from the taper shank portion of a turret tool. Air blow is controlled at the fol-
lowing cam shaft angles for ATC operations using M codes and all manual ATC operations of 1-
cycle or 1-step feed/return.

• ATC air blow output

ATC air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < ATC air blow angle 2
Item Initial Value Setting Range
ATC air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999
ATC air blow angle 2 285.000 0 to 359.999
 5262-E P-89
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Angle of end face air blow

End face air blow is supplied from the end face of a turret tool (the portion gripped with the tool
change arm). Air blow is controlled at the following angles of the cam shaft for ATC operations using
M codes and all manual ATC operations of 1-cycle or 1-step feed/return.

• End face air blow output

End face air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < End face air blow angle 2
Item Initial Value Setting Range
End face air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999
End face air blow angle 2 75.000 0 to 359.999

Cam shaft answer angle

The completion answer of ATC sequence No.9 due to 1-cycle start of automatic operation, MDI
operation, and manual operation is returned when the cam shaft has reached the angle set on this
parameter, and the system goes to the next sequence.

• Answer of ATC sequence No. 9

Angle of cam shaft = Cam shaft answer angle
Item Initial Value Setting Range
Cam shaft answer angle 345 0 to 359.999

9-11. Step Division Parameter

ATC sequence No. 9 assigns a full rotation of the cam shaft as a sequence step, and controls
replacement between a turret tool and an RS tool as a series of operation. On the other hand, step
feed/return proceeding ATC individual operations one by one divides a step at any timing according
to the purpose. Division is based on the angle of the cam shaft.
For this parameter, operate the variable directly in the adjustment mode. No special setup screen is
available.

• Sequence No.9, first step

0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < First division cam angle

• Sequence No.9, second step

First division cam angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Second division cam angle

• Sequence No.9, third step

Second division cam angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

The following relation is assumed as magnitude relation between first division cam angle and sec-
ond division cam angle.
First division cam angle < second division cam angle

When the parameter setting is zero, the sequence is not divided. That is, if either parameter is zero,
ATC sequence No. 9 is two steps, and if both parameters are zero, the sequence is not divided but
the cam shaft makes a 360° rotation as a series of operation.

Item Initial Value Setting Range

First division cam angle 65.000 0 to 359.999
Second division cam angle 295.000 0 to 359.999
 5262-E P-90
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

9-12. ATC Tool Change Arm (Machine System Parameter No.18-2)

(1) When valid:
Motor output torque is limited according to the torque limit value set on the tool change arm
torque limit parameter (machine system parameter No.18-3).
When invalid:
Motor output torque is limited to the maximum output torque specific to the motor (300% of the
motor rating).
Item Initial Value Setting Range Setting Unit
Tool change arm torque limit invalid 0 0.1 -

(2) Set a delay time that begins with entry of confirmation input and lasts until the confirmation input
is valid on the sequence for which clamping/unclamping a turret tool is the operation condition
of ATC.
Item Initial Value Setting Range Setting Unit
Turret tool clamp confirmation timer 50 0 to 1000 1 msec
Turret tool unclamp confirmation
50 0 to 1000 1 msec
timer

9-13. Tool Change Arm Torque Limit Parameter (Machine System

Parameter No.18-3)
The maximum output torque of the cam shaft motor can be limited by cam angles in order to protect
the tool change arm driving system. These items can be valid by setting the tool change arm torque
limit (machine system parameter No.18-2).

Item Initial Value Setting Range Setting Unit

Angle 0 to 360 0.001 deg
Torque limit value 0 to 100 %

9-14. Tool Change Arm Override 1 (Machine System Parameter No.18-4)

(1) Cam shaft override function
Set override during the cam shaft operation at ATC sequence No. 9, for each operation mode.
Set the override value for the machine system parameter.
Item Initial Value Setting Range Remarks
Zero is handled
Cam shaft override (automatic/MDI) 0 0 to 100
as 100%.
Zero is handled
Cam shaft override (manual) 0 0 to 50
as 50%.

(2) Cam shaft override enabling condition

You can select either enabling override at any time in the automatic/MDI operation mode or
enabling it only upon a 180° rotation of the large diameter tool and heavy tool and upon extrac-
tion/insertion of the EA tool.
The angle of the cam shaft upon a 180° rotation of a tool and upon extraction/insertion of a tool
ranges from 75° to 285°.
Item Initial Value Setting Range
Cam shaft override enabling condition Always Always/large diameter and heavy
 5262-E P-91
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

9-15. Tool Change Arm Override 2, 3 (Machine System Parameter No.18-

5, 6)
You can apply override in each operation mode ranging any cam shaft angle.
Six points for automatic/MDI operations and four points for manual operation can be set in the range
of cam shaft angle. Outside the Setting Range of the override value, there is no difference among
automatic, MDI, and manual operation modes.

Setting
Item Initial Value Setting Unit Remarks
Range
Start position 0 0 to 359.999 1 degree
End position 0 0 to 359.999 1 degree
0 to 100
(manual)
Zero is han-
Override value 0 50 to 100 %
dled as 100%.
(automatic/
MDI)
Valid/invalid Invalid Valid/invalid
 5262-E P-92
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

10. System Check

When operating the ATC units manually at the start-up of the ATC system, for example, operating
the ATC unit at a normal speed may constitute hazardous situation. For the operation of the ATC in
such cases, pulse handle feed or jog feed is possible.

10-1. System Check Mode Parameters

The desired system check mode is selected using the MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (SYSTEM
CHECK MODE) screen in the parameter setting mode.

LE32114R0100400480001

Press the function key [F1] (MENU) and select the required system check item.
While the system check mode is selected, the alarm D “4708 ATC system check mode” appears.
This operation is effective only in MANUAL mode.

Operation
System check cancel
NC axis IL release
GA (3) axis P.H. mode
EC (4) axis P.H. mode
EZ (5) axis P.H. mode
EC/EG override effective
MG axis rapid feed PB
EC axis rapid feed PB
EZ axis rapid feed PB
Sequence No. forced change
ATC individual operation
 5262-E P-93
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(1) System check cancel

Cancels the system check mode.

(2) NC axis IL release

Usually, an interlock is set so that the X-/Y-/Z-axis of the A-turret cannot be moved when the
ATC arm is in the machine. This interlock can be released by selecting this check mode.

(3) GA (3) axis P.H. mode

Enables pulse handle operation of the ATC magazine axis (GA axis). In this check mode, pulse
handle operation is disabled for other axes.
Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(4) EC (4) axis P.H. mode

Enables pulse handle operation of the EC axis (ATC tool change arm rotation axis). In this
check mode, pulse handle operation is disabled for other axes.
Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(5) EZ (5) axis P.H. mode

Enables pulse handle operation of the EZ axis (ATC tool change arm advance/retract axis). In
this check mode, pulse handle operation is disabled for other axes.
Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(6) EC/EG override effective

Makes rapid feed override (axis feed override switch) valid for manual one cycle of ATC opera-
tion and manual 1 step advance/reverse operation.

(7) MG axis rapid feed PB

Enables jog feed of the ATC magazine axis using the JOG feed switches [←] and [→].

(8) EC axis rapid feed PB

Enables jog feed of the EC axis (ATC tool change arm rotation axis) using the JOG feed
switches [←] and [→].

(9) EZ axis rapid feed PB

Enables jog feed of the EZ axis (ATC tool change arm advance/retract axis) using the JOG feed
switches [←] and [→].

(10) ATC SQ. NO change (ATC operation sequence number change)

When setting ATC operation sequence numbers at the machine system parameter [ATC] 1.
ATC sequence no., select “ATC SEQ. NO. change”.

(11) ATC manual operation (ATC manual operation)

To use the ATC individual operation function, select ENABLE at INDIVIDUAL OP.

CAUTION
The system check mode function is provided to operate the ATC if the ATC fails to operate auto-
matically or when adjusting the machine.
Therefore, interlock is not set at all and the ATC operates as intended even if the attempted oper-
ation does not follow the ATC operation sequence. Pay special attention to interference and
operate the ATC very carefully.
 5262-E P-94
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

10-2. ATC Parameters

The ATC parameters are not operated usually and operating them becomes necessary when recov-
ering the ATC operation or initializing the system. Select the “ATC” at the MC SYSTEM PARAME-
TER (ATC) screen.

LE32114R0100400490001

(1) ATC SEQUENCE NO.

Used for defining an ATC operation sequence number.
If a number is set for this parameter, the signals are output as shown in the output logic table
according to the specified sequence number. Therefore, the ATC will move suddenly if a
parameter is set inadvertently.
Basically, the current ATC status must be checked and the corresponding ATC sequence num-
ber should be input.
When setting ATC operation sequence numbers at this parameter, it is necessary to select
“ATC SEQ. NO. change” on the machine system parameter [SYSTEM CHECK MODE] screen.
Once an ATC operation sequence number is changed, [System check mode] is automatically
changed to the state of [System check cancel]. Therefore, each time you change the ATC oper-
ation sequence number successively, select the [ATC SEQ. NO. change] on the [SYSTEM
CHECK MODE] screen.rd

(2) ATC A/B MODE

Designates the tool change arm rotation mode.
Rotation mode A: 1
Rotation mode B: 2
To designate the tool change arm rotation mode, select “1” at the MC SYSTEM PARAMETER
(SYSTEM CHECK MODE) screen.

(3) Ignore tool change pos. by ATC IL release PB

When operating the ATC in 1-step advance/reverse mode while pressing the interlock release
button at the ATC operation panel, set this parameter valid to disregard the tool change position
condition from the input conditions indicated in the manual interlock table.
 5262-E P-95
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(4) Perform continuous motion by holding STEP PB

When operating the ATC using the 1 STEP ADVANCE and 1 STEP REVERSE buttons, set this
parameter valid and the ATC operates continuously when the 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEP
REVERSE button is kept pressed.

(5) MG index offset with MG panel operation

There are two magazine pot index positions - ATC position and magazine panel position. At the
ATC position, a tool is exchanged between the magazine pot and the turret, and at the maga-
zine panel position, a tool is directly mounted to the magazine pot. The number of pots
between the ATC position and the magazine panel position should be set for this parameter.

(6) GA axis override

Set the override value for the GA axis (magazine rotation axis). The value set for this parame-
ter is always valid.

(7) EC axis override

Set the override value for the EC axis (tool change arm rotation axis). The value set for this
parameter is always valid.

(8) EZ axis override

Set the override value for the EZ axis (tool change arm advance/retract axis). The value set for
this parameter is always valid.

(9) Releasing communication error between magazine operation panel and the NC
If an error occurs at the magazine panel and correct communications cannot be established, a
communication error keeps remain. Since the functions other than the magazine panel are
operable, it is possible to enable resetting the communication error until correct communication
is recovered.
Put a checkmark at this parameter. The magazine panel communication error can be released
by resetting the NC.
At turning on the power, however, an alarm message is displayed if a communication error
occurs, disregarding the parameter setting.

(10) Magazine int. cancel

If an error occurs at the magazine panel disabling correct communications while the magazine
is operating in the magazine manual operation intervention mode, it becomes impossible to
cancel the manual operation intervention mode.
In such a case, put a checkmark at this parameter and reset the NC to cancel the manual inter-
vention mode.
 5262-E P-96
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(11) MG panel communication retry counter

Setting range: 1 to 20
Initial value: 3
At the occurrence of communication alarm (error information from the NC is other than
“0”):Communication alarm control processing is executed if the following is satisfied.
Continuous occurrence of communication error ≥ Retry count set for this parameter
In the following case, occurrence of communication error is disregarded and corresponding pro-
cessing is not executed.
Continuous occurrence of communication error < Retry count set for this parameter
The function executes the alarm processing as indicated below, if it judges the occurrence of
communication alarm from the continuous occurrence of communication error.
(Continuous occurrence of communication error ≥ Retry count set for this parameter)
Displaying the message showing the occurrence of magazine operation panel communication
error alarm
Ignoring the operation of the switches at the magazine operation panel
Canceling the magazine rotation/indexing operation initiated by the operation at the magazine
operation panel
If a communication error occurs during manual magazine rotation/indexing using the switches
at the magazine operation panel, it is regarded as the communication alarm disregarding the
setting for this parameter and the processing indicated above is executed.

(12) ATC tool exchange 3STEP disable

This parameter is effective only when the cam type ATC is used.
When a checkmark is put at this parameter, the tool change arm performs the following three
steps successively: work extraction, rotation, and work insertion.af1

(13) Tool Unclamp Status Confirmation Timer (MULTUS-B300/B400)

When the machine output “Tool Unclamp: ON” and machine input “Tool Unclamp Confirmation
PS: ON” continue for the period set for the tool unclamp status confirmation timer, the control
status is set to “Turret Tool Unclamp”.
Setting unit: 0.01 sec
Initial value: 0 (Setting value 0 → The control status immediately changes to “Turret Tool
Unclamp” when the machine input conditions are satisfied.)
Setting range: 0 to 1000

(14) Tool Clamp Status Confirmation Timer (MULTUS-B300/B400)

When the machine output “Tool Unclamp: OFF” and machine input “Tool Unclamp Confirmation
PS: OFF” continue for the period set for the tool clamp status confirmation timer, the control sta-
tus is set to “Turret Tool Clamp”.
Setting unit: 0.01 sec
Initial value: 0 (Setting value 0 → The control status immediately changes to “Turret Tool
Clamp” when the machine input conditions are satisfied.)
Setting range: 0 to 1000

(15) EZ Axis Torque Limit (MULTUS-B300/B400)

To prevent the breakage of the tool change arm, the torque of the EZ axis (motor load factor) is
always monitored and the alarm A activates when the value set for this parameter.
Setting unit: %
Initial value: 280
Setting range: 0 to 500
 5262-E P-97
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(16) EA Rotatable Position EZ (MULTUS-B300/B400)

The position of the EZ axis exceeds the position set by this parameter while extracting a tool
with the tool change arm, the tool change arm starts rotating and EC axis and EZ axis operate
at the same time.
Setting unit:0.001 mm
Initial value:4250
Setting range:0 to value set for EZ axis positioning point 2

10-3. Manual ATC Operation

If automatic ATC operation is interrupted or if ATC operation cannot be recovered even if the 1
STEP ADVANCE/REVERSE buttons are used, it is possible to return the ATC operation sequence
to the initial state by operating the ATC manually.
The manual ATC operation function is provided for this purpose. In manual operation of the ATC,
however, each operation step can be executed without confirming the signal input status, meaning
that interlock is not set.

Manual ATC Operation Mode

To enter the manual ATC operation mode, conditions indicated below must be satisfied.

• Manual operation mode

• ATC cycle is not being executed.

• Machine lock function is not ON.

• Magazine panel manual intervention mode is not ON.

• Alarm A is not occurring.

• Manual tool mounting/removal request is not given.

• The NC is not in the power save mode.

Procedure for entering the manual ATC operation mode:

Procedure :

1 Select the parameter set mode.

2 Display the machine system parameter [SYSTEM CHECK MODE] by pressing the function key
[ITEM] or [DISPLAY CHANGE].

3 Select [ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION] in the system check mode.

4 Select the manual operation mode.

5 Select [ATC CONDITION DISPLAY] by pressing the [DISPLAY CHANGE].

6 Press the PAGE key to display the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.
 5262-E P-98
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Manual ATC Operation Screen

When the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION mode is selected, the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen
(Page 2) described in 8-1 is changed to the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.h

LE32114R0100400500001

The items displayed at this screen are the same as the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen. At the
ATC MANUAL OPERATION screen, however, the following items are additionally displayed.

(1) INDIVIDUAL OP
When the individual operation is enabled, the cursor can move to the checkbox for each of the
individual operation items, allowing you to select required individual operations.

(2) INDIV. OP. CANCEL

To return the ATC to the previous ATC operating conditions from the individual operation mode
after completing individual operations. However, there is no need to recover the previous ATC
conditions such as operation checks of ATC components or initial settings or it is impossible to
return to the previous ATC conditions, select ENABLE at INDIV. OP. CANCEL.

(3) Reverse display of individual operation items

The current ATC status is identified by the reverse display of operation items at ATC SEQ. NO.
on the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.000
 5262-E P-99
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Operating the ATC Manually

CAUTION
Since manual ATC operation function is provided to operate the ATC when automatic ATC opera-
tion is disabled, interlock is not taken when operating the ATC manually. Therefore, operate the
ATC very carefully paying attention to interference.

Procedure :

1 Select the ATC individual operation mode.

2 Locate the cursor at INDIVIDUAL OP. on the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen and select
ENABLE.

3 Move the cursor to the checkbox of the required ATC individual operation items.

4 Put a checkmark at required ATC individual operation items using the MENU function.
You cannot remove the checkmarks from the presently checked items. The check mark will dis-
appear when you put a checkmark at the contradicting individual operation item. The contra-
dicting individual operation items cannot be selected at the same time, but the several items
indifferent to each other can be selected simultaneously.

5 To execute the individual operation items where checkmarks are put, press the INTERLOCK
RELEASE button and 1 CYCLE START button at the same time on the ATC operation panel.

Forced Canceling of Manual ATC Operation Mode

CAUTION
The MAN. OP. CANCEL function is provided to forcibly exit the manual ATC operation mode.
After exiting the manual ATC operation mode forcibly, the ATC operates so that the status before
the entry to the manual ATC operation mode is restored. In other words, the ATC operates so
that the status indicated by the highlighting operation step items at the ATC MANUAL OPERA-
TION screen are restored. Note that ATC operation to restore the previous status is performed
without interlock.

The procedure after entering the manual ATC operation mode is described below.

Procedure :

1 At the ATC MANUAL OPERATION screen, move the cursor to the MAN. OP. CANCEL item.

2 Select ENABLE at INDIV. OP. CANCEL using the [MENU] key.

The INTERLOCK RELEASE and 1 CYCLE START buttons at the ATC operation panel start
blinking.

3 Press the INTERLOCK RELEASE and the 1 CYCLE START button, at the ATC operation
panel, simultaneously. Operation steps highlighted at the ATC MANUAL OPERATION screen
are executed at the timing the buttons are released.
 5262-E P-100
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

11. Others

11-1. G and M Code Macro Functions

(1) G Code Macro Function
CALL, MODIN and MODOUT statements, provided by the user task 2 specification (optional
specification), can be specified by G code commands of the G code macro function.
A G code macro command must always be specified in a block without other commands and
only a sequence number may be specified before a G code.
A G, S, T, and/or M code is disregarded if it is specified with a G code macro command in the
same block.
Note that G171 (positioning at the tool change position), an ATC macro command, is a G code
macro command and one block of commands “G171 ATP=?” designates a series of operation
of turret rotation to the ATC position, shutter open/close and positioning at the tool change posi-
tion.

a. G224
Cancels the MODIN statement, in the same manner as the MODOUT statement.
Command format: G224

b. G161 to G171
Just as with the MODIN statement, these G code commands remain valid until G224
(MODOUT statement) is executed. These G codes automatically call and execute the sub-
program set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axis move-
ment command.
Command format:
G161 <Q_> <Variable setting>
Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed.
If omitted, it indicates “1”.
Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram.

c. G171
For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of
“positioning to the ATC position”.
As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OG171 in the maker sub-
program file.
Command format:
G171 <Variable setting>
Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram. ATP is set for G171.

d. G205 to G214
Just as with the CALL statement, these G code commands automatically call and execute
the subprogram set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axis
movement command.
Command format:
G205 <Q_> <Variable setting>
Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed.
If omitted, it indicates “1”.
Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram.
 5262-E P-101
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

(2) M Code Macro Function

CALL statement, provided by the user task 2 specification (optional specification), can be spec-
ified by an M code command of the M code macro function.
An M code macro command must always be specified in a block without other commands and
only a sequence number may be specified before an M code.
A G, S, T, and/or M code is disregarded if it is specified with an M code macro command in the
same block.
Note that M421/M422 (positioning at the tool change position/tool change), an ATC macro com-
mand, is an M code macro command and one block of M code command “M421/M422” desig-
nates a series of operation of turret rotation to the ATC position, shutter open/close and
positioning at the tool change position.

a. M421
For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of
“positioning to the ATC position/tool change/positioning to the return position”.
As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OM421 in the maker sub-
program file.
Command format: M421

b. M422
For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of
“positioning to the ATC position/tool change”.
As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OM422 in the maker sub-
program file.
Command format: M422

c. M441 to M460
Just as with the CALL statement, these M code commands automatically call and execute
the subprogram set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axis
movement command.
Command format:
M441 <Q_>
Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed.
If omitted, it indicates “1”.

(3) Subprogram Name Setting

The subprogram name of the subprograms to be called by the G/M code macro command is set
at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen. A subprogram name must consist of five alphanu-
meric characters beginning with character O.
An error occurs if a subprogram name is not set for the subprogram that will be called by a G or
M code macro command. An error also occurs if the subprogram, selected in automatic mode,
does not exist at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen.
Conversely, if a subprogram name set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen is changed
after that subprogram is selected, and if the changed subprogram is not selected, the following
alarm occurs at the execution of a G code macro command or an M code macro command.
Alarm B 2280 SUB PROGRAM program name
 5262-E P-102
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

11-2. ATC Macro Command Subprograms

11-2-1. Called Subprograms

The ATC macro commands (G171, M421, M422) have the same function as the CALL statement.
G171 → Calls subprogram OG171.
M421 → Calls subprogram OM421.
M422 → Calls subprogram OM422.

11-2-2. Subprogram Specifications

The list and flowchart of ATC macro commands (G171, M421, M422) are sown below.
Subprograms of the individual ATC macro commands are stored in the maker subprogram file or the
maker library program file (LKSI300?.MSB or LMSI300?.LIB ?: revision-name).

System Common Variables and System Variables

VS07 ATP command

VS08 AHP command value/HP command value of G21
VS09 Turret number of MT command
VS10 Tool number of the tool presently mounted in the turret which is specified by the MT
command turret number
VS12 Work variable
VSATC ATC specification
VRSTT Restart
VMTTR Turret number specified by MT command
VYMOD Y-axis control mode
VKND Long tool
VMLCK Machine lock
VAPAX Actual position of X-axis (machine coordinate system)
VPVLX Variable limit of X-axis in the positive direction
VTIDA Turret indexing to the ATC position
VSIOX X-axis command value (program coordinate system)
VZOFX X-axis zero offset
VZSHX X-axis zero shift
VETFX Presently used X–axis offset
VMTTL Tool number specified by MT command
VTSPC Turret specification table
VTTLN[*] Tool number of tool mounted in turret station *

VTSPC bit7:Face tool

bit6:Side tool
bit5:Sensor tool
bit4:L-tool
bit3:M-tool
bit2:Empty
bit1:Empty
bit0:ATC not possible
 5262-E P-103
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

List and Flowchart

OG171 OM422
NOEX SATC=VSATC CALL OCHMT
IF AHP NN6 VS07=VMTTR
IF ATP NN1 IF [VRSTT NE 0] NN3
GOTO NATP IF [VMLCK NE 0] NN3
NN1 VS07=ATP VS10=VTTLN [VS07]
IF [VS07 LT 1] NATP IF [VMTTL EQ 0] NN1
IF [VS07 GT 12] NATP IF [VS10 EQ VMTTL] NRTS
CALL OHPPD NN1 VS12=VSIOX
IF [VS08 NE 0] NN5 IF [VYMOD NE 128] NN1A
NATP VUACM [1] = 'ATP' VS12=VS12 2
GOTO NALM NN1A VS12=VS12+VZOFX+VZSHX+VETFX-VPVLX
NN5 TC=VS07 IF [VS12 GE -1] NN2
GOTO NN6A IF [VTIDA EQ 128] NN2
NN6 IF [AHP LT 1] NAHP TC=VS07
IF[AHP GT 5] NAHP NN2 CALL OHPPD
VS08=AHP G21 HP=VS08
NN6A IF [SATC GE 1] NN7 MT=VMTTR+VMTTL 100
M205 NN3 TC=VS07 M06
NN7 IF [VRSTT NE 0] NN8 NRTS RTS
IF [VYMOD EQ 128] NN8
NN7A G138
NN8 G21 HP=VS08
IF [VS08 LT 4] NRTS OHPPD
G136 VS08=1
IF [ [VKND1 [1] AND 4] EQ 4] NRTS IF [ [VTSPC [VS07] AND 16] EQ 16] NRTS
IF [SATC GE 1] NRTS VS08=2
M204 IF [ [VTSPC [VS07] AND 136] EQ 136] NRTS
GOTO NRTS VS08=3
NAHP VUACM [1] = 'AHP' IF [ [VTSPC [VS07] AND 72] EQ 72] NRTS
NALM NOEX VDOUT [992] =0 VS08=0
NRTS RTS NRTS RTS

OCHMT
OM421
IF [MT NE 0] NRTS
CALL OCHMT VUACM [1] = 'MT'
VS09=VMTTR VDOUT [992] =0
IF [VRSTT NE 0] NN10 NRTS RTS
IF [VMLCK NE 0] NN10
MT=VMTTR+VMTTL 100
VS10=VTTLN [VS09]
IF [VMTTL EQ 0] NN1
IF [VS10 EQ VMTTL] NRTS
NN1 VS12=VAPAX-VPVLX
IF [VS12 GE -1] NN2
IF [VTIDA EQ 128] NN2
IF [VYMOD NE 128] N421
NN2 G171 ATP=VS09
M06
G171 AHP=4
GOTO NN11
NN10 TC=VS09
M06
NN11 IF [VSATC GE 1] NN12
GOTO NRTS
NN12 IF [ [VDIN [1255] AND 16] EQ 16] NN13
T=VS09 100
GOTO NRTS
NN13 T=VS09 1000
GOTO NRTS
N421 VUACM [1] = 'M421'
VDOUT [992] =0
NRTS RTS
LE32114R0100400530001
 5262-E P-104
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

OG171
VSATC 1:Macturn30
SATC = VSATC 2:Macturn50

AHP command existing? NN6

YES NO
AHP ? 1 AHP 5
NO YES
ATP command existing? 1A
NO VS08 = AHP
ATP ?

NN1 YES NAHP

VS07=ATP VUACM[1]= 'AHP'

NO NATP
1 VS07 12
VUACM[1]='ATP'
YES
Determining the HP
OHPPD NALM
command
VDOUT[992]=0
NO
VS08 0
YES
NN5
Indexing the turret
1A
TC = VS07 to the ATC position
NN6A
Macturn-ATC
YES
SATC 1
NO 2A
Opening
M205 the shutter HP=1,2,3
YES
NN7 VS08 < 4
Restarting?
NO
YES Y-axis control
VRSTT 0
In Y-axis control G136 mode OFF
NO
mode? T1:Long tool
YES
VYMOD=1 YES
VKND[1]AND 4
NN7A NO =4
Y-axis control
NO
G138 mode ON MacTurn-ATC
YES
NN8 SATC 1
Moving to the tool NO
G21 HP=VS08 change position Closing the
M204 shutter
2A
NRTS
RTS
LE32114R0100400530002
 5262-E P-105
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Checking the MT command value

Turret number of the MT command

Restarting?

Machine lock ON?

Turret indexing
MT command
Tool number of the tool to be mounted to the
turret number specified by MT command Tool change

MT command tool number = 0?

NN1 1 MacTurn ATC?
Is MT command tool number = NO
Tool number of the tool presently 1
mounted in the turret? YES
NN12 200 pairs?
NO
VDIN[1255] AND 16 = 16
YES

X-axis y Variable limit

in the positive direction? T = VS09 * 100 T = VS09 * 1000

Turret indexed to
the ATC position?

Y-axis mode not ON?

Alarm B
User reserve code
Positioning to
the tool change
position
Tool change

return position
ATC Specification
NN12
Tool data 200 sets

NN13

LE32114R0100400530003
 5262-E P-106
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

OM422

OCHMT Checking the MT command value

VS07=VMTTR Turret number of the MT command

Restarting?
YES
VRSTT 0
NO Machine lock ON?
YES
VMLCK 0
Tool number of the tool to be
NO
mounted to the turret number
VS10=VTTLN[VS07] specified by MT command
MT command tool number = 0?
YES
VMTTL=0
NO Is MT command tool
number = Tool number
YES
VS10=VMTTL of the tool presently
mounted in the turret?
NO
NN1

VS12=VSIOX
Y-axis mode ON?
YES
VYMOD 128
NO
VS12=VS12 2
NN1A

VS12 =
VS12+VZOFX+VZSHX+VETFX-VPVLX
X-axis y Variable limit in the positive
direction? YES
VS12 -1
Turret indexed to the
NO ATC position?
YES
VT1DA=128
NO Turret number of
TC=VS07 the MT command
NN2

OHPPD Home position point data

G21 HP=VS08 Moving to the home position

MT=VMTTR+VMTTL 100 MT command

NN3
Indexing the turret to the ATC position
TC=VS07 M06
Tool change
NRTS

RTS
LE32114R0100400530004
 5262-E P-107
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

OHPPD

VS08=1
L-tool turret?
VTSPC[VS07] AND 16=16 YES

NO
VS06=2
Face M-tool turret?

VTSPC[VS07] AND 136=136

YES

NO
VS06=3
Side M-tool turret?

VTSPC[VS07] AND 72=72

YES

NO
VS08=0

NRTS

RTS

OCHMT
MT command value 0?

MT 0 YES

NO
VUACM[1]= 'MT'

VUOUT[992]=0

NRTS

RTS
LE32114R0100400530005
 5262-E P-108
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

11-3. Optical In–process Workpiece Gauging Specification (Optional

Specification)
The NC lathe with ATC of the optical in-process workpiece gauging specification (optional specifica-
tion) uses the sensor of the in-process workpiece gauging specification (optional specification) by
mounting it from the magazine to the turret by the ATC. An optical sensor that transmits the touch
signal by infrared ray is used.

[Supplement]

The optical in-process workpiece gauging specification executes the same gauging function pro-
vided by the workpiece gauging specification as the optional specification using the optical sensor
that can be handled by the ATC. Therefore, only operation specific to the optical in-process work-
piece gauging specification is described below. For details of the sensor operation and gauging
program, refer to the [GAUGING SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL].

(1) Added Commands

M270...........Sensor ON command
The optical sensor operates using a built-in battery. Taking into consideration the battery life,
gauging cycle is executed only after turning on the optical sensor by the M270 command.
M269...........Sensor OFF command
The command turns off the optical sensor.
M270/M269 commands are specified in the “in-process gauging MSB file” prepared by Okuma.
Accordingly, it is not necessary to specify M270/M269 in a user’s program when the gauging
function is called by the gauging subprogram prepared by Okuma.
TL = **{{...........Turret indexing to the cutting position command (TL= ***{{{)
OSP receives the sensor’s touch signal in the state the sensor is indexed to the cutting position.
When the sensor is not indexed to the cutting position, the sensor signal input is disabled and
OSP does not recognize the sensor’s touch signal even if it is input.

(2) Sensor Status Check

OSP checks the status of the optical sensor and an alarm occurs if the sensor ON command
(M270) or the gauging cycle command (G30) is executed while battery voltage is low or when
the sensor is in an error status.

(3) Gauging Range

Since an optical sensor is used, gauging is not possible if the signal transmitted by infrared ray
from the sensor cannot be received by the receiver mounted in the CNC. Therefore, gauging
must be carried out in the range where signal transmission between the sensor and the receiver
is possible.
 5262-E P-109
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

11-4. At the Occurrence of ATC Failure

The explanation given below shows the information useful to minimize machine down time at the
occurrence of a trouble with the ATC.

11-4-1. Outline of ATC Control

For the operation of the ATC, a servomotor is used for magazine rotation, tool change arm rotation
and advance/retract and hydraulic power is used for other ATC operation.
ATC operation is performed by changing over the hydraulic circuit using solenoid valves and opera-
tion status of the ATC is confirmed by limit switches, proximity switches, auto-switches, etc.
In other words, the ATC controller recognizes the ATC status by the status of the signals input from
the switches and sensors and outputs the commands to the solenoid valves and servomotors
according to the input signals to operate the ATC.

11-4-2. Logic Tables

To operate the ATC, the controller operates the magazine, the tool change arm and other ATC units
step by step to change tools.
A tool change cycle is divided into operation steps and solenoid valve operation is controlled to real-
ize the individual steps. The signals to be output to achieve these individual steps are summarized
in the table form as the output logic table.
Meanwhile, the controller cannot confirm if the ATC units have actually operated as instructed by the
output signals if only outputs are sent to the solenoid valves. The controller judges whether the
operation step for which it has output the signals has been completed from the signals input from the
corresponding limit switches. The input logic table shows the signals that must be input for each
step.
In addition to the input and output logic tables, the manual interlock table is provided to show the
status of confirmation input signals for each step to be used for manual one step advance/reverse
operation. This table shows the signals that must be confirmed for judging the completion of ATC
step.
To understand the ATC operation, an operator is required to understand the input logic table, the
output logic table and the manual interlock table.

(1) Reading the Output Logic Table

The output logic table is provided in “ATC Logic Tables”, “Output Logic Tables”.
Operation steps of the ATC are arranged vertically and the solenoid valves and operation com-
mand names used to operate the ATC are arranged horizontally in the title column. The status
of the outputs can be checked at the CHECK DATA screen.
Reading the table:
Solenoid output statuses (ON/OFF) required to perform each ATC operation sequence (step)
are indicated in the table. In the table “{” represents “ON” and blank represents “OFF”.

(2) Reading the Input Logic Table and the Manual Interlock Table
The input logic table is provided in “ATC Logic Tables”, “Input Logic Tables” and the manual
interlock table is provided in “ATC Logic Tables”, “Manual Interlock Tables”.
As with the output logic table, ATC operation steps are arranged vertically in the table with the
input conditions necessary to complete the each step arranged horizontally. The status of the
inputs can also be checked at the CHECK DATA screen.
Reading the table:
The ON/OFF status of the confirmation input signals, required for the completion of the ATC
operation sequence (step), are shown in the table. In the table “{” represents “ON” and blank
represents “OFF”.
 5262-E P-110
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

11-4-3. If the ATC Fails to Operate

If the ATC fails to operate in response to manual ATC operation or ATC operation commands, the
cause is probably one of the following:

(1) When manual ATC operation is attempted (other than 1 step advance and 1 step reverse oper-
ation), the actual ATC sequence number differs from the ATC sequence number in which the
attempted step can be executed.

(2) When an ATC command is given, the actual ATC sequence number differs from the ATC
sequence number in which the attempted step can be executed.

(3) When an ATC command is given, the ATC confirmation input signal status differs from the input
signal status that allows the execution of the attempted ATC operation command, shown in the
input logic table.

(4) When an ATC command is given, the ATC confirmation input signal status differs from the input
signal status that allows the execution of the attempted ATC operation command, shown in the
input logic table.

(5) The confirmation input signals are not input correctly due to a problem with the proximity
switches/limit switches (operation failure due to misalignment of the mechanical parts, improper
adjustments, damage, cable breakage, etc.) or due to blockage in the hydraulic piping, which
means that the input conditions shown in the input logic table are not satisfied and thus comple-
tion of ATC operation sequence cannot be confirmed.

If the ATC Operation Sequence Number is Incorrect

If the ATC fails to operate due to incorrect ATC operation sequence number, as with cases (1) and
(2) above, such a problem often occurs when operating the ATC in the manner as shown below.

• Operating the ATC automatically using the ATC command by interrupting manual ATC opera-
tion (1 step advance, 1 step reverse).

• Recovering the ATC after interrupting the ATC operation by pressing the reset button.

• Recovering the ATC after interrupting the ATC operation by pressing the emergency stop button
and resetting the emergency stop state by pressing the reset button.

When operating the ATC manually or executing an ATC command, the ATC operation sequence
number at which the specific operation/command is allowed is predetermined (refer to 4-2 “Manual
ATC Operation” and Section 5 “ATC Program Commands”).
Therefore, the ATC does not operate if manual operation is attempted or an ATC command is exe-
cuted in a wrong ATC operation sequence number.
In the case of (1), the attempted manual operation is disregarded and in the case of (2) an alarm
occurs.
 5262-E P-111
SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

Recovering the interrupted operation:

Procedure :

1 Display the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen and check the sequence number at the ATC
SEQ. NO. item.

2 Check the correct ATC operation sequence number by referring to “Manual ATC Operation”
and “ATC Program Commands”.

3 Advance or return the ATC operation sequence number by manually operating the ATC using
the 1-step advance/1-step reverse buttons to set the ATC in the correct ATC operation
sequence number.
While the indicating lamp (LED) of the 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEP REVERSE button lights,
it indicates that 1 step advance/1 step reverse operation is permitted. Execute 1 step advance/
reverse as instructed by the lighting of the indicating lamp (LED).

4 This completes the recovery of the ATC. Perform the desired manual ATC operation or auto-
matic ATC operation.
If the ATC operation cannot be recovered by following the steps indicated above, it indicates
that the ATC confirmation input signals differ from the input conditions indicated in the input
logic table.

If the ATC Confirmation Input Signals Differ from the Input Condition Specified in the
Input Logic Table
Provided the ATC is used normally, it will be possible to recover the operation by following the steps
described in (1) above. However, if for some reason the ATC confirmation input signal status
becomes different from the input condition indicated in the input logic table, it will not be possible to
recover the ATC by using manual ATC operation.

(1) If manual ATC operation is impossible

If manual ATC operation is not possible, the conditions not satisfied are displayed a the
MACHINE DIAGNOSIS screen.

(2) If ATC commands (MT, M06, etc.) cannot be executed

When an ATC command is executed, the controller outputs the signals to the solenoid valves
according to the present ATC sequence as indicated in the output logic table. If the operation
confirmation signal is not input within the specified length of time (120 s), an alarm occurs
(Alarm C 3734 M-axis clutch connection error).
At the occurrence of the alarm, the items for which the confirmation input signal has not been
input correctly are displayed at the MACHINE DIAGNOSIS screen.
That is, the controller compares the current input signal status with the status shown in the input
logic table and the following items are displayed as the message at the MACHINE DIAGNOSIS
screen.
An item for which the input is OFF although it should be ON.
An item for which the input is ON although it should be OFF.
Confirm the items for which the actual input status differs from the status indicated in the input
logic table, display the CHECK DATA screen and confirm the current input status.

As the result of confirmation, if there are items for which the input signal status differs from the sta-
tus indicated in the input logic table although the signals are output corresponding to the present
ATC operation sequence number indicated in the output logic table, it indicates that the machine will
be faulty. In this case, contact your nearest Okuma Service Center.
 5262-E P-112
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

1. OUTLINE Y-AXIS CONTROL

1-1. OVERVIEW
This manual describes the Y-axis controlled lathe, which has been developed by adding Y-axis con-
trol mechanism to a general multifunction lathe.
Equipped with the Y-axis control, more complicated shape can be machined in only single setup. To
use the Y-axis control lathe more profitably, use this manual as a NOTICE to the standard OSP
operation manual and to the programming manual.

[Features of Y-axis controlling OSP]

(1) Compound fixed cycles are possible at a position offset in Y-axis direction.

(2) Y-axis control program can be created in the same way as programming for standard lathe.

(3) If you cancel the Y-axis control, the Y-axis unit automatically returns to the turning position.

LE32114R0100500010001
 5262-E P-113
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2. OPERATION

2-1. MACHINE OPERATION

2-1-1. Basic Layout of Operation Panels

Panels related to the machine operation are classified as indicated below:

(1) NC operation panel

The NC operation panel is used to operate the NC except for manual operation.
This panel can be used to make operations, such as file operation and data setting.

(2) Machine panel

The machine panel has the switches mainly used for manual operation.

(3) Option panel

The option panel is provided with the switches and lamps required for optionally selected func-
tions. The arrangement of the switches or lamps on the panel varies depending on the selected
optional functions.

(4) B-type panel

Unlike the above three panels, the B-type panel does not exist on the panel.
The operation buttons appear on the pop-up window by pressing the “FUNCTION SELCTION”
button on the panel.

2-1-2. Optional Panel for Y-axis Control Function

Operation Screen

LE32114R0100500030001
 5262-E P-114
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

Operation Panel
Although the FUNCTION SELECTION key and Y-AXIS OPERATION key are arranged on the same
panel in the standard specification, these keys are provided on separate panels.

• Normal Specification

LE32114R0100500030002

• Sub-spindle Specification

LE32114R0100500030003

LE32114R0100500030004
 5262-E P-115
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-1-3. Brief Description of Switches and Operation Screens

(1) FUNCTION SELECTION key
Press this key on the additional panel to display the pop-up operation screen. The Y-axis mode
can be selected and canceled and manual operation for Y-axis restoration can be executed on
the displayed screen.
(Refer to 2-1-4. “Operation Screen”.)

LE32114R0100500040001

(2) Y-AXIS OPERATION key

This button is for JOG feed or Y-axis in the manual operation. This is valid only while you keep
pressing the button. The override dial on the machine is usable for the Y-axis feed like the other
feed axis.

LE32114R0100500040002

(3) PULSE HANDLE

Y-axis movement is enabled when the X/Z/Y/W switch is positioned to Y. Multiplication of feed-
ing is the same as of the X/Z axis switch.

(4) Y-AXIS MODE ON

His key can be used to select Y-axis mode and cancel Y-axis control mode in manual operation
mode. When selecting the Y-axis control mode, the spindle must be set to C-axis connection.
When canceling the Y-axis control, the tool edge position in the Y-axis direction must be
returned to the turning position (refer to Restoration.)

LE32114R0100500040003

(5) Y-AXIS RETURN

When canceling the Y-axis mode and executing the normal turning, the tool edge (center
height) must be positioned in the center of the spindle. Since it is hard to restore the Y-axis to
the turning position in manual mode, this Y-AXIS RETURN button is used. Although the Y-axis
returns to the turning position while this button is pressed, the Y-axis stops moving when this
button in released. The axial movement is not executed after the Y-axis was returned to the
turning position.

LE32114R0100500040004
 5262-E P-116
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-2. MANUAL OPERATION

2-2-1. Axis Movement (Y-axis)

There are following two ways to move the Y-axis.

• JOG feed key

• PULSE HANDLE

JOG Feed Key

Procedure :

1 Select MANUAL on the NC operation panel.

2 Press the FUNCTION SELECTION key on the optional panel to open the multifunction machin-
ing operation window and [F3] (Y-AXIS MODE ON). The machine enters the Y-axis control
mode.

3 Press Y-axis operation or key on the option panel to move the Y-axis.

[Supplement]

• Selected axis can move while you keep pressing JOG feed key.
• Even if the Y-axis moving range is within the range set in the parameters, the Y-axis cannot
move to the variable limit position depending on the X-axis position. In this case, the limit lamp
lights ON.
• With the OVERRIDE switch on the machine panel, you can change feed speed.
 5262-E P-117
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

PULSE HANDLE

Procedure :

1 Select MANUAL on the NC operation panel.

2 Press the FUNCTION SELECTION key on the optional panel to open the multifunction machin-
ing operation window and [F3] (Y-AXIS MODE ON). The machine enters the Y-axis control
mode.

3 Select the Y-axis by using the PULSE HANDLE on the optional panel or AXIS SELCTION SW
on the portable pulse handle unit.

4 Set the axis increment (feed per pulse) of PULSE HANDLE with the PULSE HANDLE multipli-
cation switch on the machine panel.

5 Turn the handle of the hand pulse generator. If you turn in the right, the axis moves in positive
direction of the program coordinate and if left, negative direction.

[Supplement]

• You cannot select two axes at a time when you use the PULSE HANDLE.
• Refer to the following table for feed amount per 1 pulse.

Linear feeding axis Rotary feeding axis

Metric unit system inch unit system degree unit system
1/1 0.001 mm/pulse 0.0001 inch/pulse 0.001 deg/pulse
10/1 0.010 mm/pulse 0.0010 inch/pulse 0.010 deg/pulse
50/1 0.050 mm/pulse 0.0050 inch/pulse 0.050 deg/pulse
 5262-E P-118
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-3. MDI OPERATION

2-3-1. Y-axis Commands

When executing the Y-axis commands in the MDI operation, select the Y-axis control mode. The
method for execution of the other commands is the same as of the standard machine.

(1) Selecting the Y-axis control mode.

• Select the MDI operation mode.

• Set the machine to the C-axis control mode.

• Execute the Y-axis control mode ON command (G138).

(2) Canceling the Y-axis control mode.

• Execute the Y-axis control OFF command (G136).

2-4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

The automatic operation method of the Yaxis controlled lathe is the same with that of the standard
machines. For the automatic operation method, therefore, refer to the OSP Operation Manual.
This manual describes only the automatic operations peculiar to the Yaxis controlled lathe.

2-4-1. Sequence Return

The sequence return operation procedure for the Y-axis machine is basically the same as of the
standard machine.
When you operate the machine, however, be careful of the following notes.
Execute the sequence return under condition that command status in the program block to execute
the sequence return should match with the actual machine status.
Typical matching status

• C-axis connected status

• Tool turret indexing

• Valid or invalid of the Y-axis control mode

We recommend executing the sequence return with the axis positioned near the coordinate values
commanded in the program.

2-4-2. Program Restart

When you restart the program, you can execute operation in the same way as of the standard restart
operation, however, take extremely caution for the operation.
Without regarding to the Y-axis control mode of the recovered machine, the machine executes com-
mands of the program block to start. Therefore, if the restarting block and the spindle mode actually
selected is not identical, the machine operates unexpectedly. If you attempt to restart the program,
be sure to match the Y-axis control status of the block to start with the Y-axis control status of the
machine.
 5262-E P-119
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-5. NC OPERATION PANEL DISPLAY

2-5-1. Screens

Select the ACTUAL POSITION screen and then MAIN PROGRAM screen. Next, use the PAGE key
to display the screen shown below.
While the NC is in the Y-axis control mode, the actual position data appears also in the columns for
YI and XI axes. If the Y-axis control mode is not selected, asterisks appear on the YI and XI col-
umns.

• Y-axis control mode ON

LE32114R0100500120001

• Y-axis control mode OFF

LE32114R0100500120002
 5262-E P-120
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

• Actual position display screen

LE32114R0100500120003

LE32114R0100500120004
 5262-E P-121
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-6. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

2-6-1. Interlock against Axis Movement

In the Y-axis control mode, the X-axis commands are given with radius values, while the commands
are given with the diameter value in the turning mode. This is because the axis commands in the
Yaxis control mode are issued imaging the 3dimension space.
The Y-axis control mode remains effective even after the NC is reset or the power is turned ON or
OFF.
When program operation is executed in Y-axis control mode, the NC judges the specified diameter
command as a radius one. To prevent such misjudgment, the NC generates an alarm if G138 or
G136 (Y-axis control ON or OFF) is not specified before axis movement when the program operation
is started in Y-axis control mode.

2-6-2. Interlock against Turret Rotation

The turret can be rotated when the actual X coordinate is equal to or larger than the variable limit.

2-6-3. SYSTEM VARIABLES

VZOFY ............. YI-axis zero offset

VZSHY ............. YI-axis zero shift
VZOF [*] ............. YI-axis tool offset
VPVLY ............. YI-axis positive variable limit
VNVLY ............. YI-axis negative variable limit
VINPY ............. YI-axis droop value
VPFVY [*] ............. YI-axis pitch error compensation
VPCHY ............. YI-axis pitch amount
VSKPY [*] ............. YI-axis sensor touch position
VSIOY ............. Y-axis actual position in program coordinates
VETFY ............. Active. Y-axis tool offset amount
VNSRY [*] ............. Y-axis cutter radius compensation

2-6-4. LOAD MONITOR (OPTIONAL)

If the lathe is provided with the load monitor function, the load applied to the Y-axis can also be mon-
itored. In this case, the load monitor function monitors the load applied to the existing YS-axis.
Axis number to be monitored 128 Y-axis monitor ON
<Part number setting example>
To monitor the loads applied to X- and Y-axes
VLMON [1] = 2 + 128

7 6 5 4 3 2 2 0
Y Sb W M S C Z X
LE32114R0100500160001

<Others>
Whether the load monitor function is ignored or not during rapid traverse of Y-axis can be determine
by specifying M215/M216.
For the fundamental usage of the load monitor function, refer to Special Functions Manual No. 2.
 5262-E P-122
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-6-5. Y-AXIS DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

In the program operation mode, this data transfer function permits transfer of Y-axis related data;
that is, zero point data, tool data, and parameter data. This function is also used to store various set
data in the memory or a floppy disk.
For the operation procedure, refer to OSP Operation Manual.

Set Data Input/Output Format

• File name
[Character string [max. 256 characters starting with an alphabet] beginning with an alphabetic
character].TOP
The default name is “A. TOP”.

See Appendix for the list of data formats.

2-6-6. Tow-along Tailstock Control in Y-axis Control Mode

The tow-along tailstock cannot be connected nor moved in Y-axis control mode. If such a command
is issued in Y-axis control mode and in MANUAL mode, the NC ignores the command. If issued in
AUTO or MDI mode, the NC generates an alarm.
White the tailstock is connected, the Y-axis control mode cannot be established. If the Y-axis control
mode ON command is issued in MANUAL mode with the tailstock connected, the NC ignores the
command. If issued in AUTO or MDI mode, the NC generates an alarm.
 5262-E P-123
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-6-7. Y-axis Home Position Command (Optional)

When the control unit is provided with both the Y-axis control function and the home position func-
tion, the home position command can be given to the three axes; X, Y, and Z.
Program command

G20 HP = ? (? = 1 to 8)

Before using the Y-axis home position function, set the home positions at the relevant parameters.
<With Y-axis control mode ON>
The axes are positioned, at the rapid feedrate, to the machine coordinates of X-, Z-, and YS-axes
set at the parameters.
Even in axis movements by the home position command, X- and Y-axes are moved by linear inter-
polation.
<With Y-axis control mode OFF>
When the Y-axis control mode is OFF, the YS-axis data set at the parameter is ignored and only X-
and Z-axes move to the parameter-set positions.

Home Positioning Over the Variable Limit

The home position function normally carries out axis movements within the variable limit range.
However, by designating the M code for canceling the limits, axis movement is possible over the
variable limit within the stroke end limits.

M273 Home positioning is possible within the stroke end limit range.
M274 Home positioning is possible within the variable limit range.

[Supplement]

Whether M273/M274 is designated or not, M274 becomes effective with the power ON or NC
reset.
For the axis positioned outside the variable limit after M273 command is given during program
operation, the axis movement by manual interrupt is ignored.
 5262-E P-124
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-6-8. Y-AXIS CONTROL ON 2-SPINDLE LATHE

This section provides supplementary explanation about the Y-axis control function peculiar to facing
2-spindle lathes.

Y-axis Mirror Image Function

The facing 2-spindle lathe uses the program coordinate systems shown in the figure below for R and
L spindles. As can be seen from the figure, the Y-axis direction of L spindle is inverse to that of R
spindle, which may be confusing to the operator. To solve this problem, use the mirror image func-
tion. This function, like the Z-axis mirror image function, inverts the Y-axis direction of the program
coordinate system according to the data set at the relevant parameter bit.

Basic coordinate system

+X +Y
+X

+Z +Z

+Y
LE32114R0100500230001

Mirror image cordinate system

+X +X
+Y

+Z +Z

Y+
LE32114R0100500230002

<Parameter >

• Selecting the Y-axis mirror image coordinate system for L spindle

OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1st-2nd SPINDLE) 1st spindle mirror image select (Y)
do not: Basic coordinate system is selected.
select: Mirror image coordinate system is selected.

• Selecting the Y-axis mirror image coordinate system for R spindle

OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1st-2nd SPINDLE) 2nd spindle mirror image select (Y)
do not: Basic coordinate system is selected.
select: Mirror image coordinate system is selected.
 5262-E P-125
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

[Supplement]

The above optional parameter bit data becomes effective by turning on the power. After changing
the parameter data, back up the data, turn off the power, and turn on the power.

LE32114R0100500230003

Coordinate System Selection

Specify ether basic coordinate system or mirror image coordinate system for each spindle at the be-
ginning of a part program. An alarm occurs if the coordinate system selected by the program does
not match the coordinate system selected by the parameter.
Selecting basic coordinate system G62 Y0
Selecting mirror image coordinate system G62 Y1
G62 makes the NC check the part program with the above mirror image parameter data for safe op-
eration. However, omission of this command will not result in any alarm.

Others

Spindle mode cannot be changed in the Y-axis control mode.

 5262-E P-126
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-6-9. Y-axis Control Mode Forced Cancel Function

The Y-axis is controlled based on the YS-axis position parameter set as the spindle center.
The Y-axis cannot be controlled normally if the spindle center position of YS-axis is changed during
the Y-axis control mode. For this reason, an interlock function is provided to inhibit change of YS-
axis position parameter during Y-axis control mode.
In a mode other than Y-axis control mode, the machine performs cutting with the YS-axis fixed at the
spindle center position. Therefore, if the Y-axis control mode cancel command is issued, the YS-axis
automatically returns to the spindle center position before the Y-axis control mode is canceled.
However, there might be a case where the spindle center position is wrongly set on YS-axis and the
Y-axis control mode is selected. In this case if the wrong parameter data is outside the YS-axis
travel limit, the YS-axis may not be able to return to the wrongly set spindle center position. To
recover the machine from such a state, use the Y-axis control mode forced cancel function.

<Function>
When “effect” is selected at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel, the
alarm D ,,Y-axis mode forced cancel” occurs. When Y-axis mode key is pressed in the manual
mode, the NC cancels Y-axis control mode without moving YS-axis to the wrongly set spindle center
positior

<Recovery procedure>

Procedure :

1 Select “effect” at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel.
The alarm D 4258 “Y-axis mode forced cancel” occurs.

2 Select the manual mode.

3 Press the Y-axis mode key on the additional operation panel to forcibly cancel the Y-axis con-
trol mode. When Y-axis mode is canceled, the back-lighted key lamp goes out.

4 Correct the system parameter data for specifying the YS-axis spindle center position.

5 Select “cancel” at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel.

6 Press the Y-axis mode key to select the Y-axis control mode, and again press the Y-axis mode
key to cancel the Y-axis control mode. The YS-axis will return to the correctly set position.

<OPTIONAL PARAMETER(Y-AXIS)>
Y-axis mode forced cancel
cancel: Forced cancel invalid (default).
effect: Forced cancel valid.

[Supplement]

G136 is usable even while the Y-axis control mode is canceled. If G136 is issued while the forced
cancel is effective, the YS-axis moves to the spindle center position.
 5262-E P-127
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

LE32114R0100500260001

2-6-10. Resetting YS-axis Overtravel

When the YS-axis travel end limit has been exceeded, reset the state following the procedure below.
Turn on the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch inside the control box.

Procedure :

1 Press the RESET button.

2 Select the manual operation mode by pressing the MANUAL key.

3 Turn on the PULSE HANDLE Y-AXIS switch.

4 Turn the pulse handle to move the YS-axis off the travel end limit position.

5 Turn off the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch.

6 Press the RESET button.

Normally, the pulse handle of YS-axis cannot be selected in any mode other than V-axis control
mode. However, it can be moved independently using the pulse handle if the PULSE HANDLE Y-
AXIS switch is turned on with the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch ON.
 5262-E P-128
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

2-6-11. Y–axis Barrier Function (Optional)

To prevent interference of the saddle, a barrier zone is set within the axis operating range to disable
the entry of the saddle into the set barrier zone.

(1) Parameters
Set the following parameters to establish the barrier zone.
Setting unit, initial setting value and setting range are common to all parameters.
OPTIONAL PARAMETER Y-AXIS screen
X-axis barrier length (radius) Setting unit: 1m
Y-axis barrier length Initial setting value : 0
Z-axis barrier length Setting range: -9999999 to 99999999

LE32114R0100500280001

(2) Barrier Zone

Barrier setting range and axis movable range are determined as shown below according to the
parameter setting.

a. If a positive (+) value is set

Barrier zone:”Negative stroke end limit” - Smaller than “Negative stroke end limit + Set
value”
Movable range: “Negative stroke end limit + Set value” - “Positive stroke end limit”

b. If a negative (-) value is set

Barrier zone:Larger than “Positive stroke end limit + Set value” - “Positive stroke end limit”
Movable range: “Negative stroke end limit” - “Positive stroke end limit + Set value”

c. If “0” is set
Barrier zone:Negative stroke end limit - Positive stroke end limit
Movable range:None
The area where the individual axes are located in the respective barrier zone is called the
barrier area.
This function is invalid if the setting for this parameter is “0” for two or more axes.
 5262-E P-129
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(3) Interlock
In the operation in the automatic or MDI mode, if an axis movement command causing the axis
to enter the barrier zone is specified or an operation to move an axis into the barrier zone is
attempted, an alarm occurs and the turret stops moving.
Even if manual operation to move an axis into the barrier zone is attempted, the turret stops at
a point away from the barrier zone.
If the turret is already positioned in the barrier zone, manually move it away from the barrier
zone.
In this manual operation, an axis can only be moved in the direction it moves away from the bar-
rier zone.

Barrier area

Barrier zone

Stroke end limit

LE32114R0100500280002
 5262-E P-130
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

3. PROGRAMMING

3-1. OVERVIEW
The program is created with 3dimensional coordinates of X, Y and Z-axes. In this case, the X and Y-
axis commands are given with radius values. Therefore, in order to distinguish these axes from
those used for turning, they are expressed as Xl, YI and ZI in the Y-axis control mode.

3-2. Y-AXIS CONTROL COMMANDS

3-2-1. Y-axis Control Mode Commands

Use the following G codes to enter or exit Y-axis control mode.

• Y-axis control mode ON command : G138

• Y-axis control mode OFF command: G136

[Supplement]

• During the Y-axis control mode, the Y-axis mode button lamp lights on the option panel.
• On receiving the Y-axis control mode OFF command, the NC automatically returns the Y-axis
to the turning position.

3-2-2. Precautions for Executing Y-axis Control Mode Commands

(1) If you execute the Y-axis control mode OFF command (G136), the YS axis is positioned at the
spindle center and the Y-axis control mode goes OFF regardless of the Y-axis position.

(2) During the Y-axis control mode, you cannot use the coordinate conversion function.
Turn off the Y-axis control mode before using the coordinate conversion function.

(3) Before executing the sequence return in the Y-axis control mode, return the Y-axis in the Y-axis
control mode beforehand.

(4) The Y-axis control mode remains effective even after NC reset or power ON/OFF. In the Y-axis
control mode, the X-axis commands are given with radius values.
For these reasons, before attempting axis movement by MDI commands immediately after turn-
ing on the power, be sure to check whether the Y-axis control mode is established or not.
 5262-E P-131
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

3-2-3. Axis Motion Commands

G codes which can initiate axis motion in the Y-axis control mode are G00 and G01.

(1) Usable G codes

G00:Positioning at the rapid feedrate
G01:Linear interpolation
In both G00 and G01 modes, X, Y, and Z commands can be designated simultaneously.

• ln Y-axis control mode, even a rapid traverse command is executed by linear interpolation.
Therefore, when X-axis and Y-axis commands are designated in the same block, the rapid
feedrate is limited to the rapid feedrates of XI-axis and YI-axis.

• Since the spindle is stopped in the Y-axis control mode, designate the cutting feedrate in
units of “feed per minute”.

(2) Y-Z, X-Y plane arc commands

Arc commands can be designated in the Y-Z plane or the X-Y plane by selecting the Y-Z plane
or the X-Y plane in the Y-axis control mode.

• Plane designation code

G19: Y-Z plane designation
G18: Z-X plane designation
G17: X-Y plane designation

G19 and G17 can be designated only in the Y-axis control mode.
When the NC has been reset, when the Y-axis control mode has been turned off, or when
the power has been turned on, G18 (X-Z plane designation) is effective.

• Arc designation method

Y-Z plane arc
G02 Y Z J K(L) F . . Clockwise
G03 Y Z J K(L) F . . Counterclockwise
X-Y plane arc

G02 X Y I J(L) FClockwise

G03 X Y I J(L) FCounterclockwise

X:X-coordinate of the arc end point

Y:Y-coordinate of the arc end point
Z:Z-coordinate of the arc end point
I:Component of arc radius in the X-axis direction
J:Component of arc radius in the Y-axis direction
K:Component of arc radius in the Z-axis direction
L:Radius designated as the arc radius value
F:Feedrate
 5262-E P-132
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

G03 Arc end point G02

YI YI
Arc end point

L Arc start point

J L
J

ZI ZI

K K
Arc start point

G02 Arc end point G03

YI YI
Arc end point

L Arc start point

J L
J

XI XI

I I
Arc start point
LE32114R0100500320001

[Supplement]

1) In the Y-Z plane, X-axis commands can not be designated as arc commands. In the same
way, Z-axis values cannot be given to the X-Y plane arc command.
2) In the Y-Z plane, the arc rotating direction, OW or COW, should be specified by viewing the
plane from the X-axis positive direction to its negative direction. On the X-Y plane, the arc
rotating direction should be specified by viewing the plane from the Z-axis positive direction to
its negative direction.
3) The plus and minus signs of I, J and K commands are definet( viewing the arc center from the
arc start point.
4) The arc radius can be designated by using an L command or by using I, J and K commands.
When the arc radius is designated using an L command, the arc whose center angle is within
180° is selected.
 5262-E P-133
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

3-2-4. X and Y Commands

In the Y-axis control mode, YI and XI commands are designated in radius in reference to the pro-
gram zero. Note that YI commands can be designated only in the Y-axis control mode.
If they are designated in other than the Y-axis control mode, an alarm occurs.

3-2-5. Y-axis Zero Shift

As in the case of X- and Z-axes, the Y-axis zero point can be shifted with the Y-axis control mode
ON. However, since the Y-axis control mode is effective, specify the shift amount of X-axis with a
radius value.

G50 X Y Z C
 5262-E P-134
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

3-3. Y-AXIS COMPOUND FIXED CYCLES

3-3-1. Compound Fixed Cycles Usable in the Y-axis Control Mode

Code Compound Fixed Cycle Name Programming Format

G181 Drilling cycle with repeat function G181, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E
G182 Boring cycle with repeat function G182, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E
Deep-hole drilling cycle with repeat G183, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, D, E, L
G183
function
G184 Tapping cycle with repeat function G184, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E
Reaming/boring cycle with repeat G189, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E
G189
function
Synchronized tapping cycle in the G178, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, D, J, Q
G178
reverse direction with repeat function
Synchronized tapping cycle in the for- G179, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, D, J, Q
G179
ward direction with repeat function
Keyway cutting cycle with repeat G190, X, Y, Z, C, I(K), D, U(W), E, F,
G190
function Q, M21 1/M212, M213/M214
Vertical groove cycle with repeat G191, X, Y, Z, C, R, J, F, Q, I
G191
function
G180 Cancel of compound fixed cycle G180

[Supplement]

The compound fixed cycles usable in Y-axis control mode are limited to side face machining.
For end face machining, carry out contour generation as in the conventional way.
 5262-E P-135
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

3-3-2. Basic Axis Motions

Axes move as illustrated below by designating a block of programs in the G181, G182, G183,
G184,G189, G178, or G179 mode.
In the Y-axis control mode, use radial values for designating commands.

Y Y

Q1
Q2
Q3
Y Q4
Z X
Z X
I

Y
Q2
X
Q3 I

Q4 Q1

Z
LE32114R0100500360001

Basic Axis Motion

Q1 Y-,Z-,and C-axes are positioned at the rapid feedrate.
Q2 The X-axis is positioned at the(Q1-shift amount I) point at the rapid feedrate.
Q3 The tool moves at a cutting feedrate from point Q2 to point X.
The tool returns to the start point of the Q3 cycle at the rapid feedrate or at a
Q4
cutting feedrate.
 5262-E P-136
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

3-3-3. Axis Motion Specific to Each Compound Fixed Cycles

(1) Drilling Cycle (G181)

Y (Xa-l, Yb, Zb)

(Xa, Yb, Zb)
Q2
X
Q3
I
Q1
(Xb, Yb, Zb) Q4

(Xa, Ya, Za)

Z
LE32114R0100500370001

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G181 Xb Yb Zb C I F
N103 G180

<Details of Motion>
Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode After the completion of positioning, the M-
Q1 →
with the C-axis at its commanded position tool rotates in the forward direction.
Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 After the completion of positioning, the C-
Q2 →
mode axis is clamped.
Q3 The tool moves up to point Xb at a cutting feedrate in the G01 mode.
Positioning at the cutting start point in the After the completion of positioning at the
Q4 →
G00 mode cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped.
 5262-E P-137
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(2) Boring Cycle (182)

Y (Xa-l, Yb, Zb)

(Xa, Yb, Zb)
Q2
X
Q3
I
Q1
(Xb, Yb, Zb) Q4

(Xa, Ya, Za)

Z
LE32114R0100500370002

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G182 Xb Yb Zb C I F E
N103 G180
<Details of Motion>
Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode After the completion of positioning, the M-
Q1 →
with the C-axis at its commanded position tool rotates in the forward direction.
Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 After the completion of positioning, the C-
Q2 →
mode axis is clamped.
The tool moves up to point Xb at a cuffing After point Xb has been reached, the cycle
feedrate in the G01 mode. is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (can be
Q3 → omitted)
After the completion of the dwell, the M-tool
stops.
Positioning at the cuffing start point in the After the completion of positioning at the
Q4 G00 mode → cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped.
The M-tool rotates in the forward direction.
 5262-E P-138
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(3) Deep-hole Drilling Cycle (G183)

(Xa-l, Yb, Zb)

Y
I Q2
(Xa, Yb, Zb)
L
Q3
Q1 X
L
D
(Xa, Ya, Za)
/2 Q4
/2

(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Z
LE32114R0100500370003

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G183 Xb Yb Zb C I F E D L
N103 G180
<Details of Motion>
Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode After the completion of positioning, the M-
Q1 →
with the C-axis at its commanded position tool rotates in the forward direction.
Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 After the completion of positioning, the C-
Q2 →
mode axis is clamped.
The tool moves toward point Xb by “step After point Xb has been reached, the cycle
feed” in the G01 mode. is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (can be
In the “step feed” mode, cutting is performed omitted)
following the steps below.
The tool is fed by “D”. Then it is retracted by
Q3 “ “ at the rapid feedrate. That is repeated →
until the depth of cut reaches “L”. The tool
returns to the cutting start point at the rapid
feedrate. Then, the tool is fed by “D” from
the previous infeed point. This drilling cycle
is repeated until the tool reaches the target
point Xb.
Positioning at the cutting start point in the After the completion of positioning at the
Q4 →
G00 mode cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped.
 5262-E P-139
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(4) Tapping Cycle (G184)

Y (Xa-l, Yb, Zb)

(Xa, Yb, Zb)
Q2
X
Q3
I
Q1
(Xb, Yb, Zb) Q4

(Xa, Ya, Za)

Z
LE32114R0100500370004

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G184 Xb Yb Zb C I F E
N103 G180

<Details of Motion>
Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in After the completion of positioning,
Q1 the G00 mode with the C-axis → the M-tool rotates in the forward
at its commanded position direction.
Positioning at the (Xa - I) point After the completion of positioning,
Q2 →
in the G00 mode the C-axis is clamped.
The tool moves up to point Xb After point Xb has been reached,
at a cutting feedrate in the the cycle is interrupted for dwell
G01 mode. duration “E”. (can be omitted)
Q3 →
After the completion of the dwell,
the M-tool once stops and then
rotates in the reverse direction.
Positioning at the cutting start After the completion of positioning, The M-tool once
point in the G01 mode the C-axis is unclamped. stops and then
Q4 → →
rotates in the for-
ward direction.
 5262-E P-140
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(5) Reaming/Boring Cycle (G189)

Y (Xa-l, Yb, Zb)

(Xa, Yb, Zb)
Q2
X
Q3
I
Q1
(Xb, Yb, Zb) Q4

(Xa, Ya, Za)

Z
LE32114R0100500370005

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G189 Xb Yb Zb C I F E
N103 G180

<Details of Motion>
Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode After the completion of positioning, the M-
Q1 →
with the C-axis at its commanded position tool rotates in the forward direction.
Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 After the completion of positioning, the C-
Q2 →
mode axis is clamped.
The tool moves up to point Xb at a cutting After point Xb has been reached, the cycle
Q3 feedrate in the G01 mode. → is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (can be
omitted)
Positioning at the cutting start point in the After the completion of positioning, the C-
Q4 →
G01 mode axis is unclamped.
 5262-E P-141
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(6) Synchronized Tapping Cycles (G178,G179,optional)

Y (Xa-l, Yb, Zb)

(Xa, Yb, Zb)
Q2
X
Q3
I
Q1
(Xb, Yb, Zb) Q4

(Xa, Ya, Za)

Z
LE32114R0100500370006

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G178 Xb Yb Zb C I D F
N103 G180

<Details of Motion>
Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode After the completion of positioning, the C-
Q1 →
with the C-axis at its commanded position axis is clamped.
Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 After the completion of positioning, if a D
mode command has been designated, the M-tool
Q2 →
spindle is positioned at the D command
point. Then the C-axis is clamped.
The M-tool spindle and the X-axis are fed simultaneously up to point Xb while rotating the M-tool
Q3
spindle in the forward direction.
The M-tool spindle and the X-axis are fed simultaneously up to the cutting start point while rotat-
Q4
ing the M-tool spindle in the reverse direction.
 5262-E P-142
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(7) Keyway Cutting Cycle (G190)(On side face)

This command executes the cycle of cutting keyways which are offset in Y-axis direction or the
keyways on the Y-Z plane.

Cutting target point

Y (Xb, Yb, Zb)

Q4
Q3
Q3
Q3
Q3
U D
Z D Q4
D
X
Q2
I
Q1
Cycle start point
(Xa, Ya, Za)
LE32114R0100500370007

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G190 Xb Yb Zb C I D F U E M211 (M212) M213 (M214)
N103 G180

<Details of Motion>
Positioning at the C-axis command value in the G00 mode with X-, T-, and Z-axes remaining at
Q1
the positions specified in N100
Q2 Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in G00 mode
The tool moves to the (Xb, Yb, Zb) point with a cutting depth D in the specified cutting direction
Q3
and according to the specified cutting method.
Q4 Positioning at the cutting start point in G00 mode

[Supplement]

For designation of cutting direction, cutting method, and others, refer to the description of keyway
cutting cycle in the operation and programming manuals for multimachining function.
 5262-E P-143
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(8) Keyway Cutting Cycle (G190) (On End Face)

This command executes the cycle of cutting keyways which are offset in Y-axis direction or the
keyways on the X-Y plane.
The keyway cutting cycle on the end face of a workpiece (X-Y plane) is possible using a contour
creation machining.

Cutting target point

Y
( Xb, Yb, Zb )

X
Q3 Q4

Q3 Q3
Q3
W D Q4
D
D
Z Q2 Q1
K
Cycle start point
( Xa, Ya, Za )
LE32114R0100500370008

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G190 Xb Yb Zb C K D F W E M211 (M212) M213 (M214)
N103 G180

<Details of Motion>
Positioning at the C-axis command value in the G00 mode with X-, Y-, and Z-axes remaining at
Q1
the positions specified in N100
Q2 Positioning at the (Za ? K) point in G00 mode
The tool moves to the (Xb, Yb, Zb) point with a cutting depth D in the specified cutting direction
Q3
and according to the specified cutting method.
Q4 Positioning at the cutting start point in G00 mode

[Supplement]

For designation of cutting direction, cutting method, and others, refer to the description of keyway
cutting cycle in the operation and programming manuals for multi-machining function.
 5262-E P-144
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(9) Vertical Groove Cycle (G191)

This is the cycle for performing cutting feed in Y-axis direction after positioning X-, Z-, and C-
axes.

Q1
Q2
Y
(Xa, Ya, Za)

Q3

Q4
I

Z Cutting target point

(Xb, Yb, Zb)
X
LE32114R0100500370009

<Programming Format>
N100 G00 Xa Ya Za
N101 G94 SB=
N102 G190 Xb Yb Zb C I D F U E M211 (M212) M213 (M214)
N103 G180

<Details of Motion>
Q1 Positioning at the (Xa, Ya, Zb, C) point in G00 mode
Q2 Positioning at the (Ya - J) point in G00 mode
Q3 The tool moves to the (Xb, Yb, Zb) point at a cutting feedrate.
Q4 The tool runs off in X-axis direction by the amount of I and returns to the Q3 cutting start point.
 5262-E P-145
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

4. Slant Machining Mode Function

4-1. Overview
MACTURN and MULTUS featuring the B-axis 1 indexing function can index a tool mounted on a tur-
ret in any direction on the X-Z plane.
Fig. 9-1 shows an example of a machining along a slant direction with the turret indexed slantwise
(referred as slant machining hereafter).
The NC needs to calculate a target position when executing axis movements indicated in Fig. 9-1.
Calculating a target position will be simplified in a converted coordinate system by rotating the coor-
dinate axes.
The slant machining mode function simplifies calculation of a target position by using coordinate
conversion; thereby facilitating programming for slant machining.

X+ Turret slant angle

Start position Pf (Za, Xa)

L
Zb = Za - L·cos
L cos
Xb = Xa - L
L·sin
sin

Target position Pt (Zb, Xb)

Z+
Fig. 9-1
LE32114R0100500390001
 5262-E P-146
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

4-2. Coordinate System for Slant Machining

To simplify the positioning in the slant machining, a converted coordinate system (a slant machining
coordinate system) is generated when the slant machining mode is selected. In the slant machining
mode, an axis command in the converted coordinate system is converted into a position command
in the base coordinate system before axis movement.

(1) Definition of Converted Coordinate System

“A coordinate system is defined as the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’ when the Z-axis is
rotated counterclockwise to align with the Z’-axis with the offset position of the zero point of the
X-, Y-, and Z- axes as a center of rotation in a base coordinate system.”

(2) Relation between Base and Converted Coordinate Systems

The following figure shows the relation between the base coordinate system and the converted
coordinate system.

X+
X' +

Xa P
Z' +

Xa' Za'

Z+
0 Za

Fig. 9-2
LE32114R0100500400001

An angle θ between the Z-axis and the Z’-axis is a rotation angle used in coordinate conversion.
The rotation center 0 of the coordinate system is the zero offset position of the X-, Y-, and Z-
axes.
The coordinate of a point P is defined as [Xa, Ya, Za] in the base coordinate system (X-Y-Z) and
as [Xa’, Ya, Za’] in the converted coordinate system (X’-Y-Z’) in the figure above. As a result, the
following relations are derived.
Xa’ = Xa • cosθ - Za • sinθ
Za’ = Xa • sinθ + Za • cosθ
 5262-E P-147
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(3) Two Spindle Models

For the two-spindle models such as a machine with a sub spindle or a turning center with facing
spindles, the coordinate system for a mirror image of Z-axis may be selected. In this case, the
coordinate rotating direction in axis conversion is defined as a clockwise direction assuming
that the Z-axis positive direction is 0° as shown in the following figure.

Fig. 9-3
LE32114R0100500400002
 5262-E P-148
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

4-3. Slant Machining Mode Commands

(1) Slant Machining Mode ON/OFF Commands
The following G code commands select or cancel the slant machining mode.
(The B command specifies a rotation angle of the coordinate system)
G127 B*** Slant machining mode ON command
(B: -359.999 - 359.999)
G126 Slant machining mode OFF command

• The slant machining mode is effective during the period between executions of G127 com-
mand and G126 command. During this mode, positioning is conducted based on the slant
machining coordinate system (X’-Y-Z’).

• When the B command is left blank, the rotation angle of the coordinate system is consid-
ered as 0°.

• The slant machining mode becomes “OFF” with the NC reset or execution of M02 (end of
program).

(2) Restrictions on Slant Machining Mode ON/OFF Commands

If the slant machining mode ON/OFF command (G127/G126) is issued when the following con-
ditions are not met, an alarm occurs and the command will be revoked.

Conditions for issuing the slant machining mode ON command (G127)

• Y-axis mode is selected.

• Nose-R compensation is not in progress.

• Nose-R compensation is not in progress.

• Slant machining mode is not selected yet.

• Coordinate conversion is not in progress (on the machine with the coordinate conversion
function).

• Compound fixed cycle is not under execution.

Slant machining mode OFF command (G126)

• Compound fixed cycle is not under execution.

(3) Manual Axis Feed in Slant Direction

When the slant machining mode ON command is issued, the B command value (coordinate
rotation angle) issued in the same block is automatically set at the rotation angle on the SLANT
FEED DIRECTION SET screen. This enables manual axis feed in slant direction.
 5262-E P-149
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

4-4. Functions Usable in Slant Machining Mode

(1) G Codes and Axis Commands Usable in Slant Machining Mode
The following commands are available in the slant machining mode.
Rapid traverse positioning command (G00)
Cutting feed positioning command (G01)
Circular interpolation cutting commands (G02/G03)
Cutter radius compensation commands (G41/G42)
Compound fixed cycle commands (G178 to G184, G189 to G191)
Zero point shift command (G50)
Commands other than those listed above (including fixed cycle commands) will cause an alarm.
The above commands can be specified with the following axis commands:
X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis
The X-, Y-, and Z-axis positions should be specified in the slant machining coordinate system
X’-Y-Z’.
The C-axis command is available only when the spindle is connected with the C-axis (by M110
command).
Helical cutting is possible for the machine equipped with the helical cutting specification.

(2) Rapid Traverse Positioning Command (G00)

Rapid traverse commands are placed under the following restrictions in the slant machining
mode.
Rapid traverse rates of X-, Y-, and Z-axes in the base coordinate system are reduced to a half
of the specified parameter value during interpolation of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes (so that the rapid
traverse rate of the slant axis does not exceed the limit).
The C-axis, however, moves at the rapid traverse rate specified in the relevant parameter, and
its movement is not interpolated with other axes.

(3) Circular Interpolation Cutting Command and Cutter Radius Compensation Command
The circular interpolation cutting commands and the cutter radius compensation commands are
executed on the X’-Y plane, Z’-X’ plane, and Y-Z’ plane in the slant machining mode.
The G41 and G42 issued in the slant machining mode are treated as the cutter radius compen-
sation commands (instead of the nose-R compensation commands) even when the Z’-X’ plane
is specified.
<Specifying Compensation Plane>
Before issuing the command for circular interpolation cutting or cutter radius compensation,
specify a plane where such command will be executed.
G17.......Cutter radius compensation on X’-Y plane
G18.......Cutter radius compensation on Z’-X’ plane
G19.......Cutter radius compensation on Y-Z’ plane
G 18 is selected by default when the power is turned on, the NC is reset, or M02 is executed.
<Cutting Direction in Circular Interpolation>

• X’-Y plane (G17)

G02: Clockwise seen from Z’-axis positive direction to negative direction
G03: Counterclockwise seen from Z’-axis positive direction to negative direction

• Z’-X’ plane (G18)

G02: Clockwise seen from Y-axis positive direction to negative direction
G03: Counterclockwise seen from Y-axis positive direction to negative direction

• Y-Z’ plane (G19)

G02: Clockwise seen from X’-axis positive direction to negative direction
G03: Counterclockwise seen from X’-axis positive direction to negative direction
 5262-E P-150
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

<Restrictions on Specifying Compensation Plane and Cutter Radius ON/OFF Command>

• Be sure to specify the compensation plane (G17/G18/G19) and the slant machining mode
ON command (G127) before the cutter radius compensation commands (G41/G42).

• The slant machining mode ON/OFF commands are invalid during cutter radius compensa-
tion (an alarm will occur).

• The specified compensation plane remains unchanged after the slant machining mode ON/
OFF commands.
[Command example]

:
N100 G17 Specifies the compensation plane X–Y.
N110 G127 B30 Selects the slant machining mode
with a slant angle of 30 .
N120 G41 Activates the cutter radius
compensation to the left.
:
N140 G40 Deactivates the cutter radius
compensation.
Compensation plane: X'-Y
N150 G42 Activates the cutter radius
compensation to the right.
:
N180 G40 Deactivates the cutter radius
compensation.
N190 G126 Cancels the slant machining mode.
N200 G19 Returns the compensation plane to Y–Z.
LE32114R0100500420001

(4) Compound Fixed Cycle

The compound fixed cycle in the slant machining mode has the same command format as that
for the Y-axis fixed cycle in the base coordinate system except that the operation direction is
changed to the direction in the slant machining coordinate system X’-Y’-Z.
Refer to the 8-2 “Y-axis Compound Fixed Cycles” for more information.

(5) Zero Point Shift Command (G50)

The zero point shift amount can be changed with the G50 command even during the slant
machining mode.
The following command, when specified in the slant machining mode, changes the zero point
shift amount of the base coordinate system so that the specified axes in the slant machining
coordinate system are located on the program coordinates.
G50 X__ Z__ Y__ C__

(6) STM Command

The STM commands are not restricted in the slant machining mode.
For example, the turret can rotate even in the slant machining mode as far as the axis positions
meet the turret rotating conditions in the base coordinate system.
 5262-E P-151
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(7) System Variables

The following system variables are only read and written as the values represented in the slant
machining coordinate system in the slant machining mode.
[Applicable system variables]

• VZSHX: X-axis zero point shift amount

• VZSHY: Y-axis zero point shift amount

• VZSHZ: Z-axis zero point shift amount

• VSIOX: X-axis actual position

• VSIOY: Y-axis actual position

• VSIOZ: Z-axis actual position

(8) Tool Offsets

Even during the slant machining mode, the specified tool offset values are applied to the X-, Y-,
and Z-axes in the base coordinate system. This means that the X-, Y-, and Z-axis data are not
used for offsetting the specified tool in the slant machining coordinate system.

(9) Variable Limits

The X-, Y-, and Z-axis travel range in the base coordinate system is also restricted by the vari-
able limits also in the slant machining mode.

(10) Interlocks
In the slant machining mode, the following commands are disabled. An alarm occurs if any
command indicated below is specified and the specified command is disregarded.

• Y-axis mode ON/OFF command (G138, G136)

• LAP commands

• Slant machining mode ON command (G127)

• Coordinate conversion ON command (G137) (for the coordinate conversion specification)

• Spindle mode commands (G140, G141)

 5262-E P-152
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

4-5. Zero Point Shift Macro Command

(1) Overview
MacTurn30/50 performs slant hole machining using the B-axis 1 indexing function (optional).
For a turning process, the zero point in the program coordinate system is set on the centerline
of the spindle rotation. In the meanwhile, when performing a slant hole machining, specify
required program coordinates by shifting the zero point according to the machining point. Thus,
you can make programming with ease.
Specify the zero point shift amount by one of the following means.
Enter a shift amount in the item “Zero point shift” in the zero setting mode.
Specify an amount with a G50 command in the part program.
Specify a shift amount with a system variable VZSH? (? = X, Y and Z).
Since specifying an zero point shift values with the system variables requires to specify the shift
amount of X-, Y-, and Z-axes, it is necessary to change the X-axis data to a diameter value or
radius value according to whether the Y-axis mode is selected or not.
When the zero point shift macro command is specified, MacTurn30/50 converts the X-axis data
to a diameter and a radius and sets the correct shift amounts at the system variable VZSH? (? =
X, Y, and Z).

(2) Command Format

G174 SX=__ SY=__ SZ=__ :zero point shift macro command
G175 :zero point shift cancel macro command
Specify shift amounts of X-, Y-, and Z-axes at SX, SY, and SZ. The specified SX value is treated
as a radius in the Y-axis mode and treated as a diameter in a mode other than the Y-axis mode.
If G174 is doubly issued after shifting of zero point, the specified shift amount is added to the
already set data.
When G174 is specified, the NC automatically calculates the values to be set at the system
variables VZSHX, VZSHY, and VZSHZ, and internally issues the commands for setting these
variables.
Issuing G175 command cancels all the zero point shift commands specified by that time.
 5262-E P-153
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

4-6. Actual Position Display

During the slope machining mode, the actual position (X’-Y-Z’) in the converted coordinate system is
displayed on the following screen.

LE32114R0100500440001

The following data are displayed only when the slope machining mode is selected.

• XIR X’-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

• YIR Y-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

• ZIR Z’-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

• BA Rotation angle of the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

 5262-E P-154
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

5. DATA OPERATION

5-1. DATA OPERATION

This section describes the data setting necessary for Y-axis control function.

5-1-1. Zero Setting

• Zero Offset
The zero offset value is set in the coordinate system for Y-axis control. This setting should be
done in ZERO SET mode.
Display the zero point setting screen (for YI-axis, YS-axjs) by pressing the ITEM and PAGE
keys.

LE32114R0100500460001

The YS-axis zero offset value should be set with the distance from the machine zero of YS-axis
to the programming zero of YS-axis.
The following relationship exists between YS-axis zero offset value and YI-axis zero offset
value.
{(YS-axis zero offset value) - (YS-axis spindle center position)} X sin θ = (YI-axis zero offset
value) - (YS-axis spindle center position)
If a zero offset value of either YS-axis or YI-axis is changed, the other offset value is also
changed to maintain the above relationship.
 5262-E P-155
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

The offset value can be set at either YS-axis or YI-axis.

YI XI
YS

c b
X

a YS-axis spindle center position

a a: YS-axis spindle center position

YS-axis machine zero b: YS-axis zero offset
YI-axis programming zero c: YI-axis zero offset

YI-axis machine zero

: Angle formed between YS-axis and X-axis

(90° for MacTurn)
LE32114R0100500460002
 5262-E P-156
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

5-1-2. TOOL OFFSET

Dimensional accuracy in machining using the Y-axis control function is controlled by tool offset data.
Transverse keyway cutting

YI

XI
Controlled by
YI-axis tool offset

Controlled by Z-axis tool offset

Controlled by X-axis tool offset
LE32114R0100500470001

Longitudinal keyway cutting

YI

XI

Controlled by YI-axis tool offset

LE32114R0100500470002

Drilling at off-center positions

YI

XI

Controlled by YI-axis tool offset

LE32114R0100500470003

For tool offset data, three types of offset data are available; X-axis direction, YI-axis direction, and
Zaxis direction.
Because tool offset data in the X- and Z-axis direction can be set in the conventional manner, the
procedure to set tool offset data in the YI-axis direction is explained here after.
 5262-E P-157
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

YI-axis Tool Offset

YI-axis tool offset data is set to compensate the offset of the Y-axis tool center in the YI-axis direc-
tion.
YI-axis tool offset data is effective in the Y-axis control mode.

YI
Actual Y-axis
positioning point

Offset in Y-axis positioning

Programmed Y-axis
positioning point
XI
LE32114R0100500480001

(1) How to set YI-axis tool offset data:

Select the tool data setting mode by pressing the TOOL DATA key. Press the function keys [F6]
(AXIS CHANGE) to display the YI-AXIS TOOL DATA screen. Then, move the cursor to the data
column of the required offset number by using the cursor control keys and set offset data.
Setting is possible in an accuracy of 1 µm.

LE32114R0100500480002
 5262-E P-158
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(2) Examples of YI-axis Tool Offset

Example 1: Off-center position drilling

YI
Tool offset number 02

2 Actual position
(0.08)

Command position
50 (1.97)
52
XI
(2.05)

Unit : mm (in.)

LE32114R0100500480003

When performing drilling at a position 50 mm away from the workpiece center as illustrated
above, if the drill is located at the 52 mm position, set -2 mm at OFFSET NO. “02” for YI-axis.
Example 2: Longitudinal keyway cutting

YI
Tool offset number 02
0.01
(0.0004)

XI

0.01 Tool offset number 12

(0.0004)
30 (1.18)

16 (0.63)

15.98 (0.6291) Unit : mm (in.)

LE32114R0100500480004

It is possible to compensate for the dimensional error due to tool wear by setting offset data at
different tool offset numbers. To control the keyway width, for example, assign different tool off-
set numbers for the upper and lower sides of the cutting tool.
For longitudinal keyway cutting as illustrated above if

Keyway width:30 mm (1.18 in.)

M-tool diameter:16 mm (0.63 in.)
Tool wear:0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) (actual tool diameter: 15.98 mm (0.6291 in.) ),

then the finished keyway will be 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) narrower than the required width. To
obtain accurate 30 mm (1.18 in.) width, two tool offset numbers (02 and 12) can be used for a
tool (tool number 02).
Set 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.) for offset number “02” and -0.01 mm (-0.0004 in.) tor offset number
“12”.
 5262-E P-159
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

Tool Nose Radius Compensation

Tool nose radius compensation can be performed in the Y-Z plane or the X-Y plane while the Y-axis
control mode is effective.

(1) Plane Selection

Designate the following G codes to select the plane.
G19...Tool nose radius compensation in the Y-Z plane
G17...Tool nose radius compensation in the X-Y plane

[Supplement]

1) G19 and G17 are effective only in the M110 (C-axis connected) mode.
2) When the M109 (C-axis disconnected) command is executed, G18 (tool nose radius compen-
sation in the X-Z plane) will be set automatically.
3) When the power is turned on or the NC is reset, G18 (tool nose radius compensation in the X-
Z plane) will be selected automatically.

(2) Tool Nose Radius Compensation ON/OFF Commands

The following G codes are used to turn on or off tool nose radius compensation.
G40...Tool nose radius compensation OFF
G41...Tool nose radius compensation left ON (when the tool moves at the left side of the work-
piece viewed from the tool advancing direction.)
G42...Tool nose radius compensation right ON (when the tool moves at the right side of the
workpiece viewed from the tool advancing direction.)

• The relation between the tool advancing direction and the workpiece location in the rectan-
gular coordinate system which is composed of X-, Y-, and Z-axes is defined as follows.
The tool advancing direction, or, in other words, whether the tool moves at the right side or
left side of the workpiece, is viewed from the positive direction of an axis which is perpen-
dicular to the plane in which tool nose radius compensation is performed.

Y Y X
G41

G41
Z

Z
G42
G42
LE32114R0100500490001

[Supplement]

In the above figures, the tool advancing direction is viewed from the X-axis positive direction, that
is, from the machine rear.
G codes which can be used to move axes in the G19 or G17 mode are G00, G01, G02, and G03.
 5262-E P-160
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(3) Tool Nose Radius Compensation Value

The tool nose radius compensation value can be specified using a 6-digit numeral following
address T.
T {{ ∆∆
{{ : Tool nose radius compensation number
: Tool number
∆∆ : Tool offset number
Use X-Z-axis nose radius compensation values for compensating cutter radius onY-Z or X-Y
plane as in the case of normal rotary tools.

(4) Procedure for Plane Designation and Turning ON/OFF Tool Nose Radius Compensation

• The plane designation command (G19 or G17) must be designated before designating a
tool nose radius compensation command (G41 or G42).

• Designate G40 before switching the tool nose radius compensation command from G41 to
G42 or from G42 to G41.

• Designate G40 before designating a G code (G17, G18, G119, or G19) which selects a
plane for tool nose radius compensation.

N500 G19
N510 G41

N580 G40
N590 G42

N680 G40
N690 G18
LE32114R0100500490002
 5262-E P-161
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

6. PARAMETER

6-1. PARAMETER
The following parameters are added to the lathe equipped with the Y-axis control function.

6-1-1. System Parameters

AXIS DATA

Using the AXIS CHANGE key, select the screen for setting the YS-axis and YI-axis data.

• stroke end limit

• Backlash

• PR zero offset

• Stroke compensation amount

• Torque value

[Supplement]

For YI-axis, no data can be set at BACKLASH, PR ZERO OFFSET, and PR CONNECT COMP.
If either of the YS-axis and YI-axis stroke end limits is changed, the other value is also changed to
maintain the following relationship:
{(YS-axis stroke end limit valve) - (YS-axis spindle center position)} x sin θ = (YI-axis stroke end
limit valve) - (YS-axis spindle center position)

Item Default value Setting range Selling unit

+ stroke end limit Machinedependant -99999.999 - + 99999.999 Selected unit system
- stroke end limit Machinedependant -99999.999 - + 99999.999 Selected unit system
Backlash 0.010 -1.000 - + 1.000 Selected unit system
PR zero offset 0 -99999.999 - + 99999.999 Selected unit system

(1) Stroke end limit

Use these parameters to set the stroke limits of each controlled axis. If you set the stroke end
limits, the variable limit values are forcibly changed to the set limits.

(2) Backlash
Use this parameter to compensate the lost motion of YS axis. According to the set value, the
NC compensates each axis movement in positive direction.
The NC subtracts the backlash compensation amount from the value read by the encoder for
movement in positive direction. The subtraction result is handled as the true detection value.

(3) PR zero offset

Use this parameter to compensate the actual position detected by the encoder (hereafter, called
the detection value). The compensated value is regarded as the actual position in the machine
coordinate system.
The above unit amounts are for Y-axis control mode. In the other modes, the axes move by the
unit amounts normally set for XA- and ZA-axes.
 5262-E P-162
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

(4) Stroke comp.

This parameter data is used for compensating the pitch error of simplified ball screw.
This parameter will not appear if the function for compensating ball screw pitch error or Inducto-
syn pitch error is selected.

Y-axis System Parameters

(1) YS.XANGLE DATA

This parameter is used to set the angle formed between YS-axis and X-axis. Since all the Y-axis
movements are calculated based on this angle data, if the angle data is change, positioning of
Y-axis will not be normally carried out.
For MacTurn 250/350, the angle formed by YS-axis and X-axis is 120°.

(2) TURNING POSITION (YS-axis Spindle Center Position)

• This parameter is used to set the point where the YS-axis returns when the Y-axis control
mode is turned off.

• In a mode other than the Y-axis control mode, the YS-axis is fixed in the spindle center
position.

• The machine coordinate value of the YI axis, the virtual coordinate value, is determined
assuming that the YI-axis and the YS-axis intersect with each other at the YS-axis spindle
center position.

• For the sub-spindle specification model equipped with H2 turret, the spindle center position
above the sub-spindle exists as the “TURNING POSITION H”.

LE32114R0100500520001
 5262-E P-163
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

[Supplement]

The YS.X ANGLE DATA and the TURNING POSITION are basic parameters, critical for Y-axis
control in slant type machining. Therefore, the Y-axis control mode must be set OFF before
changing the data of these parameters.
The YS-axis coordinate value and the YI-axis coordinate value must always satiety the expres-
sion that includes the YS.X data and the TURNING POSITION data. Therefore, if either the YS.X
data or the TURNING POSITION data is changed, the parameter data of the YI-axis coordinate
value is automatically calculated on the basis of the YS-axis coordinate value parameter data so
that the expression will be satisfied.

6-1-2. User Parameters

• YI-axis variable limit

• YS-axis variable limit

• YS-axis droop data

(1) If either of the YS-axis and YI-axis variable limits is changed, the other value is also changed to
maintain the following relationship:
{(YS-axis variable limit) - (YS-axis spindle center position)} X sin θ = (YI-axis variable limit) -
(YS-axis spindle center position)

(2) Since the YI-axis is a virtual axis, its droop data cannot set.

Xl-axis

Yl-axis positive Yl-axis negative

variable limits variable limits

Yl-axis

LE32114R0100500530001

6-1-3. Y-axis Home Position (Optional)

For the lathes provided with both Y-axis control function and home position function, the home posi-
tion can be set at the three axes; X, Y, and Z.
Home positions of X- and Z-axes are set with the machine coordinates, while Y-axis home position
is set with the machine coordinate for YS-axis.
The parameter data can be set using the SET, ADD, and CAL functions. In parameter setting by
CAL function, the following formula is used to obtain the data to be set.
When the function key [F3] (CAL) and the WRITE key are pressed sequentially, the coordinates
where the axes are currently positioned are set at the parameters because the input value is 0.
Value to be set by calculation = Current axis position in the machine coordinate system - Input data
 5262-E P-164
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

6-1-4. Y-axis Pitch Error Compensation (Optional)

This parameter is used to set compensation for YS-axis ball screw pitch error. The pitch error com-
pensation increases cutting edge positioning accuracy in Y-axis direction in the Y-axis control mode.

6-1-5. Y-axis Turret Position Compensation

Besides the turret position error compensation of X- and Z-axes, the turret position error can be
compensated in Y-axis direction. The compensation in Y-axis direction, which is effective only in Y-
axis control mode, is carried out by the first axis movement command issued after the Y-axis control
mode is turned on.

6-1-6. Other Parameters

(1) XI-YI axis moving area expansion offset
This parameter applies only to the LT10MY model.
The YI-axis movement in positive direction is restricted by the X-axis positive travel limit.
This parameter is used to expand the YI-axis moving range in the positive direction.
The X-axis can move beyond its negative travel limit to compensate the YI-axis expansion set
with this parameter.

[Supplement]

This parameter becomes effective when the power is turned off and then turned on again.
Changing this parameter carelessly may cause the X-axis travel limit switch to operate.

(2) Automatic erasure of Y-axis graphic

If the tool path created by C-axis movement under the Y-axis control intercepts with the tool
contour line, the drawing becomes complicated and difficult to see. To prevent this, this param-
eter is used to erase the tool path and tool contour line when the Y-axis control mode is estab-
lished and the C-axis position is changed.
effect: Tool contour line is automatically erased.
cancel: Tool contour line is not automatically erased.

(3) Y-axis graphic comp plain display

The NC equipped with the Y-axis control function allows you to select the plan view (Y-Z plane)
besides the side view and the front view. This parameter is used to determine whether the plan
view is displayed or not.
display: Plan view is displayed.
do not: No plan view is displayed.

[Supplement]

This parameter becomes effective when the power is tuned off and then turned on again.
 5262-E P-165
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

7. APPENDIX

7-1. Y-AXIS MACHINING EXAMPLES (FOR A-TURRET SIDE ONLY)

Program example of Y-axis control is shown below.

7-1-1. Transverse Keyway Cutting

Transverse Keyway Cutting (1)

YI YI
c b

a
ZI XI

d e
ZI=100 (3.94) Unit : mm (in.)

LE32114R0100500590001

Program Example 1-1

N100 G13 A-turret selection

N101 G00 X800 Z800 Positioning of A-turret at indexing position
N102 M110 C-axis connection
N103 G94 X100 Z100 T0303 SB=1800 Positioning at point a, turret indexing
N104 G138 Y-axis control mode ON
N105 G00 Y50 C50 Positioning at point b, C-axis angle command
N106 X30 M13 Positioning at point c, M-tool start
N107 G01 Y-50 F100 Y-axis cutting feed
N108 G00 X50 Positioning at point e
N109 Y0 M12 Positioning at point a
N110 G136 Cancel of Y-axis control mode
N111 G00 X800 Z800
N112 M109 Cancel of C-axis connection
N113 M02
LE32114R0100500590002
 5262-E P-166
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

Transverse Keyway Cutting (2)

YI
c b

a
XI

25 35 d e
(0.98) (1.35) Unit : mm (in.)
LE32114R0100500600001

Program Example 1-2

N101 G13 A-turret selection

N102 G00 X800 Z800 Positioning of A-turret at indexing position
N103 M110 C-axis connection
N104 G94 X100 Z60 T0303 SB=1800 Positioning at point a, turret indexing
N105 G138 Y-axis control mode ON
N106 G00 Y50 C80 Positioning at point b, C-axis angle command
N107 X30 Positioning at point c
N108 G01 Y-50 M13 Y-axis cutting feed, M-tool start
N109 G00 X50 Positioning at point e
N110 C260 C-axis angle command
N111 X30 Z25 Positioning at point d
N112 G01 Y50 Y-axis cutting feed
N113 G00 X50 M12 Positioning at point b
N114 Y0 Positioning at point a
N115 G136 Cancel of Y-axis control mode
N116 G00 X800 Z800
N117 M109 Cancel of C-axis connection
N118 M02
LE32114R0100500600002
 5262-E P-167
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

7-1-2. Longitudinal Keyway Cutting

YI YI

a
ZI XI
d a c b

40
(1.57) 110 (4.33)
Unit : mm (in.)

LE32114R0100500610001

Program Example 2

N100 G13 A-turret selection

N101 G00 X800 Z800 Positioning of A-turret at indexing position
N102 M110 C-axis connection
N103 G94 X100 Z110 T0303 SB=1800 Positioning at point a, turret indexing
N104 G138 Y-axis control mode ON
N105 G00 Y-10 C110 Positioning at point b, C-axis angle command
N106 X30 Positioning at point c
N107 G01 Z40 M13 F100 Y-axis cutting feed, M-tool start
N108 G00 X50 Positioning at point b
N109 Y0 Z110 M12 Positioning at point a, M-tool stop
N110 G136 Cancel of Y-axis control mode
N111 G00 X800 Z800
N112 M109 Cancel of C-axis connection
N113 M02
LE32114R0100500610002
 5262-E P-168
SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

7-1-3. Drilling at Off-center Positions

c b
a

e d

80 (3.15) Unit : mm (in.)

LE32114R0100500620001

Program Example 3

N100 G13 A-turret selection

N101 G00 X800 Z800 Positioning of A-turret at indexing position
N102 M110 C-axis connection
N103 G94 X100 Z80 T0303 SB=1800 Positioning at point a, turret indexing
N104 G138 Y-axis control mode ON
N105 G00 Y20 C90 Positioning at point b, C-axis angle command
N106 G01 X-30 F100 M13 Positioning at point c, M-tool start
N107 G00 X50 Positioning at point b
N108 Y-50 Positioning at point d
N109 G01 X-30 Cutting feed up to point e
N110 G00 X50 Positioning at point d
N111 Y0 M12 Positioning at point a, M-tool stop
N112 G136 Cancel of Y-axis control mode
N113 G00 X800 Z800
N114 M109 Cancel of C-axis connection
N115 M02
LE32114R0100500620002
 5262-E P-169
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

1. Overview

1-1. Overview
This Chapter describes sub-spindle operation and function for MACTURN and MULTUS series.
Please use the information in this Chapter as auxiliary information to the OSP Operation Manual
and Programming Manual.

Features of OSP’s Sub Spindle Functions

(1) The workpiece machined in the main spindle can be directly transferred to the sub spindle.

(2) The workpiece can be transferred to the sub spindle at the most appropriate pressured.

(3) The sub spindle operation can be programmed in the same image as programming the opera-
tions at the main spindle.

(4) For bar materials, cut-off operation is possible.

1-2. Machine Configuration

MACTURN and MULTUS series can rotate its turret (as B-axis) around the Y-axis. When the
machine cuts the workpiece held by the sub spindle, it directs a tool toward the sub spindle by rotat-
ing the turret 180° around the Y-axis.

H1 turret

Spindle No. 1 Spindle No. 2

reference cutting position reference cutting position

X-axis X-axis

Perpendicular cutting position

LE32114R0100600020001
 5262-E P-170
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

1-3. Coordinate System

The sub spindle model with H1 turret uses three program coordinate systems for spindle No. 1
(main spindle), for spindle No. 2 (sub spindle).
The turret is commonly used for machining with headstock No. 1 and No. 2. In this case, the spindle
commands are effective for the spindle determined by the selected coordinate system.
The coordinate system can be selected either by using the mode switch on the option panel in MAN-
UAL mode or issuing the G code in AUTO or MDI mode. For the actual selection method, refer to “4.
MDI/AUTO Operation” in this section.
With the sub-spindle specification of the two-saddle machines, selection of only the spindle 1 side
coordinate system is allowed for B turret.
 5262-E P-171
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

2. Operation Panels

2-1. Basic Configuration of Operation Panels

Panels related to the machine operation are classified as indicated below:

(1) NC operation panel

The NC operation panel is used to operate the NC except for manual operation.
This panel can be used to make operations, such as file operation and data setting.

(2) Machine panel

The machine panel has the switches mainly used for manual operation.

(3) Option panel

The option panel is provided with the switches and lamps required for optionally selected func-
tions. The arrangement of the switches or lamps on the panel varies depending on the selected
optional functions.

(4) Foot Pedal (Foot Switch)

A foot pedal is provided to control the operation of such as chuck open/close and tailstock spin-
dle advance/retract.

Panel of the machine with 2 spindles

LE32114R0100600040001
 5262-E P-172
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

2-2. Option Panel for Sub-spindle Machines

The following panel is provided for the sub-spindle machine of MACTURN and MULTUS series.

LE32114R0100600050001

LE32114R0100600050002
 5262-E P-173
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

2-3. Brief Explanation of the Panels

(1) SUB-SPINDLE SELETION key
This button is use to switch the spindle mode in the manual operation mode. The lamp is pro-
vided on the upper left of this key and the lamp turns off when the main spindle mode is
selected and it turns on when the second spindle mode is selected. The selected spindle mode
appears on the upper right of this key. With this key, selection of coordinate system can be
changed.

LE32114R0100600060001

(2) ROTARY TOOL SPINDLE SELECTION key

This key can be used to switch CCW key, CW key, SPINDLE STOP key, SPINDLE JOG key
and 2 spindle override targets. 2 lamps indicating the selected axis are provided in 2 positions.
When the left side lamp of the lamps lighting when switching the main spindle and MA axis
lights, the first spindle is selected. If the right side lamp lights, the MA axis is selected. When the
upper lamp of the lamps lighting when switching the second spindle and MB axis lights, the sec-
ond is selected. If the lower side lamp lights, the MB axis is selected. However, the lamp for the
spindle that is not selected does not turn off even if the spindle mode is changed, so that you
must check the mode.

• ROTARY TOOL SPEINDLE SELECTION key

LE32114R0100600060002

• Lamps lighting when switching the first spindle and MA axis

LE32114R0100600060003

• Lamps lighting when switching the second spindle and MB axis

LE32114R0100600060004
 5262-E P-174
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

(3) SUB SPINDLE OVERRIDE

The sub spindle speed can be set by selecting the percentage of the spindle speed specified by
the program. The sub spindle override (%) can be changed by pressing [ ] and [ ]
(UP/DOWN) keys. The override stops at 100%. When you continue changing the override,
press one of these keys again. It is possible to select the override in 10 steps in the range 30 to
200%. If the spindle speed reaches the allowable speed or the spindle limit set by G50 when it
is overridden, the actual spindle speed is fixed at the allowable speed.

• Sub spindle override display

LE32114R0100600060005

• Keys using for changing the override

LE32114R0100600060006

(4) W-AXIS OPERATION keys (← and →)

These keys are W-axis (Second headstock) JOG feed keys.
The W-axis moves only while these keys are pressed.
These keys are invalid when the second spindle mode is selected.

LE32114R0100600060007

(5) PULSE HANDLE

The W-axis is manually changed by positioning the X/Z/Y/C/W switch to W. Multiplication of
feeding is the same as of the X/Z/Y/C axis switch.
 5262-E P-175
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3. Manual Operation
This section deals with the operations specific to the sub spindle.
For standard manual operation procedure, refer to the OSP Operation Manual.

3-1. Operations Related to the Spindle 1 (Main Spindle)

The explanation below shows the operation procedure for the spindle 1 (main spindle). Note that
explanation is given assuming that the main spindle mode is selected. Therefore, press the SUB
SPINDLE SELECTION key and ensure that the LED lights (main spindle mode).

3-1-1. Preparing for Main Spindle Rotation

(1) Setting the Allowable Main Spindle Chuck Speed
Set the allowable speed of the main spindle chuck for the following parameter.
MC USER PARAMETER (1 SPINDLE) Allowable chuck rotation speed

(2) Inputting the Speed Limit of the Main Spindle

Input the speed limit of the main spindle in the MDI mode.
=IN G50 S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

[Supplement]

Make sure that the main spindle mode is selected.

(3) Inputting the Main Spindle Speed

In the MDI mode, input the spindle speed at which the spindle should be operated.
=IN S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

(4) Inputting the Gear Range for the Main Spindle (For the machine equipped with a transmission)
For the machine equipped with a transmission, input the gear range that meets the input main
spindle speed. Select the MDI mode also for this operation.

3-1-2. Starting the Main Spindle CW/CCW

Procedure :

1 Confirm that the main spindle mode is selected by pressing the [MAIN SPINDLE] button.

2 Press the [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

1) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is valid for the specified spindle speed.
2) The [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button may be released after pressing it once. The
spindle keeps rotating even if the button is released.
3) To start the spindle, the chuck must be in the closed state.
4) An alarm occurs if the actual spindle speed exceeds 120% of the allowable speed of the
chuck.
5) The door must be closed.
 5262-E P-176
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-1-3. Stopping the Main Spindle

Procedure :

1 Confirm that the main spindle mode is selected by pressing the [MAIN SPINDLE] button.

2 Press the [SPINDLE - STOP] button on the machine operation panel.

3-1-4. Jogging the Main Spindle

Procedure :

1 Confirm that the main spindle mode is selected by pressing the [MAIN SPINDLE] button.

2 Press the [SPINDLE - JOG] button on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

1) Spindle jog speed is set for a parameter (machine (user) parameter).

2) The spindle jogs only while the [SPINDLE - JOG] button is held pressed.
3) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is not valid for spindle jog operation.
 5262-E P-177
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-2. Operations Related to the Spindle 2 (Sub Spindle)

The explanation below shows the operation procedure for the spindle 1 (main spindle). Note that
explanation is given assuming that the main spindle mode is selected. Therefore, press the SUB
SPINDLE SELECTION key and ensure that the LED lights (sub spindle mode).

3-2-1. Preparing for Sub Spindle Rotation

(1) Setting the Allowable Sub Spindle Chuck Speed
Set the allowable speed of the sub spindle chuck for the following parameter.
MC USER PARAMETER (2 SPINDLE) Allowable chuck rotation speed

(2) Inputting the Speed Limit of the Sub Spindle

Input the speed limit of the sub spindle in the MDI mode.
=IN G50 S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

[Supplement]

Make sure that the spindle mode IS the sub spindle mode.

(3) Inputting the Sub Spindle Speed

In the MDI mode, input the spindle speed at which the sub spindle should be operated.
=IN S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

(4) Inputting the Gear Range for the Sub Spindle (For the machine equipped with a transmission)
For the machine equipped with a transmission, input the gear range that meets the input sub
spindle speed. Select the MDI mode also for this operation.
 5262-E P-178
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-2-2. Starting the Sub Spindle CW/CCW

Procedure :

1 Select the manual mode by pressing the [MANUAL] key on the NC operation panel.

2 Confirm that the sub spindle mode is selected by pressing the [SUB-SPINDLE] button.

3 Press the [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button at the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

1) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is valid for the specified spindle speed.
For the sub spindle, use the OVERRIDE dial on the option panel.
2) The [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button may be released after pressing it once. The
spindle keeps rotating even if the button is released.
3) To start the spindle, the chuck must be in the closed state.
4) An alarm occurs if the actual spindle speed exceeds 120% of the allowable speed of the
chuck.
5) The door must be closed.

3-2-3. Stopping the Sub Spindle

Procedure :

1 Confirm that the sub spindle mode is selected by pressing the [SUB-SPINDLE] button.

2 Press the [SPINDLE - STOP] button on the machine operation panel.

3-2-4. Jogging the Sub Spindle

Procedure :

1 Confirm that the sub spindle mode is selected by pressing the [SUB-SPINDLE] button.

2 Press the [SPINDLE - JOG] button on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

1) Spindle jog speed is set for a parameter (machine (user) parameter).

2) The spindle jogs only while the [SPINDLE - JOG] button is held pressed.
3) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is not valid for spindle jog operation.
 5262-E P-179
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-3. Axis Feed Operation (X–, Z–, C–, and W–axis)

An axis (X-, Z-, C-, or W-axis) can be moved in either of the following methods.

(1) Using SLIDE JOG buttons.

(2) Using the pulse handle

3-3-1. Jog Feed Operation (for X– and Z–axis)

Procedure :

1 Press the [SLIDE JOG] button corresponding to the required axis feed direction.
Note that the arrow symbol in a button indicates the direction of saddle movement and it is not
related to the positive and negative directions in the program coordinate system.

[Supplement]

The saddle movable range is set by the parameter-set variable limits.

For the sub spindle model, the variable limits can be set for the main spindle mode and the sub
spindle mode independently. Therefore, the saddle movable range differs depending on the
selected spindle mode.

3-3-2. Jog Feed Operation (for C–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the spindle mode.

2 Select the MDI mode and execute the C-axis joint command.

3 Select the manual mode by pressing the [MANUAL] key on the NC operation panel.

4 For the C-axis, jog feed keys do not show an arrow symbol but they show the positive and neg-
ative directions in the C-axis programming coordinate system.

3-3-3. Jog Feed (for W–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the main spindle mode.

2 Press the [W-AXIS CONTROL ←] or [W-AXIS CONTROL →] button at the option panel.

[Supplement]

1) The W-axis moves only while a jog button is held pressed.

2) Feedrate override setting made at the machine operation panel is valid for W-axis feed opera-
tion.
 5262-E P-180
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-3-4. Pulse Handle Feed (for X–, Z–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the axis to move by pressing the [PULSE HANDLE - X] or [PULSE HANDLE - Z] key.

2 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE HANDLE - 1/1],
[PULSE HANDLE - 10/1] or [PULSE HANDLE - 50/1].

3 Turn the pulse handle.

The axis moves in the positive direction in the program coordinate system if the pulse handle is
turned clockwise. It moves in the negative direction if the pulse handle is turned counterclock-
wise.

[Supplement]

The saddle movable range is set by the parameter-set variable limits.

For the sub spindle model, the variable limits can be set for the main spindle mode and the sub
spindle mode independently.

3-3-5. Pulse Handle Feed (for C–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the spindle mode.

2 Select the MDI mode and execute the C-axis joint command.

3 Select the manual mode by pressing the [MANUAL] key on the NC operation panel.

4 Select the C-axis to be moved.

5 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE - 1/1], [PULSE - 10/1],
or [PULSE - 50/1] key on the machine operation panel.

6 Turn the pulse handle.

The axis moves in the positive direction in the program coordinate system if the pulse handle is
turned clockwise. It moves in the negative direction if the pulse handle is turned counterclock-
wise.
 5262-E P-181
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-3-6. Pulse Handle Feed (for W–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the main spindle mode.

2 Select the W-axis to be moved.

3 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE - 1/1], [PULSE - 10/1],
or [PULSE - 50/1] key on the machine operation panel.

4 Turn the pulse handle.

The axis moves in the positive direction in the program coordinate system if the pulse handle is
turned clockwise. It moves in the negative direction if the pulse handle is turned counterclock-
wise.

[Supplement]

1) For pulse handle operation, selection of multiple axes for simultaneous operation is not
allowed.
2) For axis feed amount per pulse, refer to the table below.

Linear feeding axis Rotary feeding axis

Metric unit system inch unit system [°] unit system
1/1 1 mm/pulse 0.0001 inch/pulse 0.001°/pulse
10/1 10 mm/pulse 0.0010 inch/pulse 0.010°/pulse
50/1 50 mm/pulse 0.0050 inch/pulse 0.050°/pulse
 5262-E P-182
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-4. M-TOOL SPINDLE OPERATION

3-4-1. Preparation before M-tool spindle Rotation

The following preparations are required before rotating the M-tool spindle.

(1) Connecting the C-axis

With the MDI operation, the machine enters C-axis connected status.
M110 [WRITE/EXECUTE] [START]

[Supplement]

The spindle mode cannot be changed after connecting the C-axis.

(2) Setting the spindle speed for the M-tool spindle

The actual M-tool spindle speed can be set with the MDI operation.
SB=_[WRITE] [START]

(3) Setting the variable speed (only if variable speed is provided)

The speed of the M-tool spindle can be changed by using the machine.
The speed change command compliant with the spindle speed is issued with MDI operation.
M24_[WRITE] [START]

3-4-2. M-tool Spindle Regular Rotation/Reverse/Stop

The procedure to operate the M-tool spindle regular rotation and reverse rotation is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Press the “ROTARY TOOL SPINDLE SELECTION” key on the additional panel (C-axis panel).
The lamp on the upper left turns ON.

2 Press the CCW key or CW key. The M-tool spindle rotates regularly or reversed way.

3 Press the “SPINDLE STOP” key on the machine panel.

[Supplement]

1) The “spindle override” on the machine panel is enabled for the M-tool spindle.
2) The M-tool spindle keeps rotating even if the key is not pressed continuously.
3) This operation must be executed while the door is closed.
4) This operation must be executed while the spindle chuck is closed.
5) An error occurs when the tool is L-tool.
6) Although the M-tool spindle rotates regardless of the spindle mode (spindle 1 or spindle 2), the
selected spindle may rotate due to operational error, so that you must check which spindle is
selected.
 5262-E P-183
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-4-3. M-tool Spindle Jog

The procedure to execute the M-tool spindle jog is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Press the “ROTARY TOOL SPINDLE SELECTION” key on the additional panel (C-axis panel).
The lamp on the upper left turns ON.

2 Press the “SPINDLE JOG” key. Jog for the M-tool spindle is executed.

[Supplement]

1) The spindle speed for jog is set by the parameter.

2) The jog operation is executed while the key is pressed.
3) The override for the M-tool spindle jog is not enabled.
4) The jog operation is available even if the C-axis is not connected.
 5262-E P-184
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

3-5. Other Manual Operations

3-5-1. Air Blow

(1) Main Spindle Air Blow
Press the [AIR BLOW] switch on the machine operation panel.

(2) Sub Spindle Air Blow

Press the [AIR BLOW] switch on the option panel.

[Supplement]

1) It is possible to jog the spindle while air blow is supplied according to the setting of a parame-
ter (machine (user) parameter).
2) It is possible to change the air blow output pattern according to the setting of a parameter
(machine (user) parameter).
For details, refer to 8-5. Machine User Parameter (Air Blow/Coolant) in this section.

3-5-2. Chuck Open/Close Operation

(1) Main Spindle Chuck
To open/close the main spindle chuck, use the main spindle chuck open/close footpedal.

(2) Sub Spindle Chuck

To open/close the main spindle chuck, use the sub spindle chuck open/close footpedal.
 5262-E P-185
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

4. MDI/Automatic Operation
For the sub-spindle specification, it is necessary to determine the coordinate system before begin-
ning automatic/MDI operation.
Determine the coordinate system by selecting the spindle used for machining.

4-1. Coordinate System Selection

A G code is used to select a coordinate system.
With the sub-spindle specification, two coordinate systems are used - one for the spindle 1 side and
the other for the spindle 2 side.

LE32114R0100600300001

Fig.4-1 Machine Configuration

With the two-saddle machines, only the spindle 1 coordinate system can be selected for the B turret.
For the B turret, it is not necessary to specify a coordinate system selection command.

[Supplement]

The G code for selecting the coordinate system must always be specified at the first block of a
program.
 5262-E P-186
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

4-2. MDI Operation

Procedure :

1 Select the MDI mode by pressing the [MDI] key on the NC operation panel.

2 Prompt “=IN” appears in the MDI data input line, indicating that the NC is ready for data input.
Input the coordinate system selection G code.
= IN G140
= IN G141

3 Press the [WRITE] key.

4 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

4-3. Automatic Operation

Since the automatic operation procedure is basically the same as operating the standard machine
automatically, refer to the OSP Operation Manual. In this section, only the operation procedure spe-
cific to the sub spindle model is described.

(1) Sequence Restart

Basic operation for sequence restart of the sub spindle model is the same as the sequence
restart for the standard machines. When executing sequence restart, however, the following
points must be carefully attended to.
Before starting the sequence restart operation, match the actual machine status to the status of
the active commands in the program block where sequence restart is executed.
The status that must be the same as the active programmed status is:
Spindle mode selection
C-axis joint status
Turret indexing
When executing the sequence restart, the axes should be positioned near the position specified
by the program.

(2) Starting a Program from Desired Sequence

Starting a program from the desired sequence can be performed in the same manner as with
the standard machines. However, this operation requires your special attention.
When a program is restarted from the desire sequence, the commands are executed in the
coordinate system of the presently selected spindle mode disregarding the spindle mode of the
restarting block. Therefore, if the spindle mode in which the program is restarted differs from the
spindle mode that was valid at the program restarting block, the machine will operate unexpect-
edly.
When starting a program from a desired sequence, make sure to select the spindle mode that
matches the spindle mode to be used for the restarting block.
 5262-E P-187
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

5. Additional Functions

5-1. Workpiece Transfer Function from the Main Spindle to the Sub
Spindle
In the sub spindle model, it is possible to directly transfer a workpiece from the main spindle to the
sub spindle. When transferring a workpiece to the sub spindle, the torque limit and the torque skip
functions are used since the workpiece must be pushed against the sub spindle chuck at an appro-
priate torque.
For details regarding torque limit and torque skip functions, refer to the OSP Programming Manual.
This subsection provides a simple program example for transferring workpiece.

:
:
G29 PW = 30 .... Limits the maximum torque of the W–axis motor
(30%).
G94 G22 W50 D5 L10 F1000 PW = 25 .... Pushes the sub–spindle chuck to the workpiece in the
torque skip state.
G29 PW = 5 .... Lowers the W–axis motor torque (5%).
M248 .... Closes the sub–spindle chuck.
M84 .... Opens the sub–spindle chuck.
G28 .... Cancels the W–axis torque limit function.
G90 G00 W300 .... Returns the second headstock to the retract position at
a rapid feedrate.
:
:

F(feedrate)

LE32114R0100600330001
 5262-E P-188
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

5-2. Z–axis Mirror Image

With the sub spindle models designed for multi-process machining, the mirror image function can be
used on both the main and sub spindle sides independently for longitudinal direction axis move-
ments.

5-2-1. Coordinate Systems

(1) Basic Coordinate System

X+ Main spindle side Sub spindle side

X+ X+

X+LMT (P) X+LMT (P)

Z+ Z+
X-LMT (P) X-LMT (P)

Z-LMP (M)
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Z+LMP (M)
Z-LMP (M)
Z+LMP (M)

[1]Z-LMP (P) [3]Z+LMP (P) Z+

machine zero
[2]Z+LMP (P) [4]Z-LMP (P)
LE32114R0100600350001
 5262-E P-189
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

(2) Mirror Image Coordinate System

X+ Main spindle side Sub spindle side

X+ X+

X+LMT (P) X+LMT (P)

Z+ Z+

X-LMT (P) X-LMT (P)

Z-LMP (M)
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Z+LMP (M)
Z-LMP (M)
Z+LMP (M)

Machine zero [1]Z+LMP (P) [3]Z-LMP (P) Z+

[2]Z-LMP (P) [4]Z+LMP (P)
Z + L M T (P)

P :Program coordinate system,

M :Machine coordinate system
Variable limit

+ :Positive(plus),
- :Nagative(minus)
Axis name
LE32114R0100600350002
 5262-E P-190
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

5-2-2. Parameter Setting

To select the mirror image coordinate system, set the necessary parameter data for each of the
main and sub spindles independently.

(1) Mirror image coordinate on the main spindle side

Display the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) screen.
Set the item “1st spindle mirror image select (Z)” to “Select”.

(2) Mirror image coordinate on the sub spindle side

Display the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) screen.
Set the item “2nd spindle mirror image select (Z)” to “Select”.

[Supplement]

The setting of the parameter above becomes valid when the power is turned on.
If the setting is changed, press function key [F5] (BACKUP) to back up the new setting, turn off
the power and then turn it on again.
The initial status is “basic coordinate system” for the main spindle and the “mirror image coordi-
nate system” for the sub spindle.

(3) Variable Limits Set by User Parameters

To switch between the basic coordinate system and the mirror image coordinate system, the
plus and minus designation of the Z-coordinate are changed only in the program coordinate
system. Therefore, variable limit values in the machine coordinate system are not changed
even when the mirror image coordinate system is selected.

X Main spindle side Sub spindle side

Z-LMT (P) Z-LMT (P)

Z+LMT (P) Z+LMT (P)

Z-LMP (M)
Z+LMP (M)
Z
Z-LMP (M)
Z+LMP (M)

LE32114R0100600360001

Z-axis Variable Limit Main Spindle Side Sub Spindle Side

Z+ variable limit (P) 250 300
Z- variable limit (P) -30 -50
Z+ variable limit (M) 6016.000 6678.000
Z- variable limit (M) 5736.000 6328.000
 5262-E P-191
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

If the coordinate system for the main spindle is switched to the mirror image coordinate system
and that for the sub spindle to the basic coordinate system with the above parameter settings,
the coordinate values will change as shown below.

X Main spindle side Sub spindle side

Z+LMT (P) Z+LMT (P)

Z-LMT (P) Z-LMT (P)

Z-LMP (M)
Z+LMP (M)
Z
Z-LMP (M)
Z+LMP (M)
LE32114R0100600360002

Z-axis Variable Limit Main Spindle Side Sub Spindle Side

Z+ variable limit (P) 30 50
Z- variable limit (P) -250 -300
Z+ variable limit (M) 6016.000 6678.000
Z- variable limit (M) 5736.000 6328.000

5-2-3. Coordinate System Designation

Designate the coordinate system to be selected, fundamental or mirror image, in the starting block
of the program. When the coordinate system designated in the part program and the coordinate
system set by the parameter do not agree, an alarm occurs.
Selecting the fundamental coordinate system : G62 Z0
Selecting the mirror image coordinate system : G62 Z1
When G62 is designated, the coordinate system designated in the part program and the coordinate
system set by the parameter are verified for safety. An alarm does not occur, however, even when
G62 is not designated.

5-2-4. Others
• When Z-axis is moved at the rapid traverse with G00 positioning command on either main or
cub spindle side, designation of a command that brings the saddle and the chuck closer to each
other exceeding the variable limit will cause an alarm. This alarm is indifferent to the direction in
the program coordinate system switched between fundamental coordinate and mirror image
coordinate.

• For the mirror image on the sub spindle side, see C. Y-AXIS CONTROL/SLOPE MACHINING
FUNCTION.
 5262-E P-192
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

5-3. Interlock (for two-saddle models only)

5-3-1. Collision Preventive Function

Since the W-axis and the ZB-axis are mounted on the same bed, there is a possibility that they col-
lide each other. To avoid this, the collision preventive function is provided so that the B-turret and
the sub spindle base will not collide each other.

Sub spindle base

B turret

Z B-axis W-axis
LE32114R0100600390001

(1) Function
The actual distance between the B-turret and the sub spindle is constantly monitored. When
the distance becomes smaller than the value set at the optional parameter during axis feed, an
alarm will occur or commands will be disregarded, corresponding to the operation mode
selected; in the manual mode, the commands will be disregarded and in the automatic and MDI
modes, an alarm will occur.
Even if an alarm occurs, axis motion in the direction that increases the distance between the B-
turret and sub spindle is possible.

a. Automatic or MDI mode

An alarm will occur if “actual distance < parameter-set distance” during axis feed.

b. Manual mode
Commands will be disregarded if “actual distance < parameter-set distance” during axis
feed. Note however the manual axis feed in the direction to increase the distance (ZB-axis
feed in the negative direction and W-axis feed in the positive direction) is possible.

(2) Parameter setting

Follow the procedure below to set a value at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPIN-
DLE) Interference-free distance ZB-W (sub spindle).

a. In the manual mode, approximate the B-saddle and sub spindle base to a point where
there is no interference between them.

b. In this condition, select the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) screen in the
parameter setting mode.

c. Move the cursor to Interference-free distance ZB-W (SUB SPINDLE).

d. Press the [F1] (SET) key to input the distance between the B-turret and sub spindle base.
If data other than the initial value has already been input, it is also possible to change the
set value by using the [F2] (ADD) function.
Setting unit : 1 µm
Setting range : 40000 to 9999999
Initial setting : 9999999

[Supplement]

If the software is re-installed, set this parameter again.

 5262-E P-193
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

5-4. W-axis Cutting Function (Optional)

The W-axis cutting function optionally available for one-saddle models only.

(1) Outline of the Function

The W-axis cutting function allows simultaneous cutting of a workpiece clamped in the main
spindle chuck using a tool set in the sub spindle and a tool in the turret. In this case, the sub
spindle base is regarded as a turret, and its motion is independently controlled as “W-axis”.

(2) Programming
When this function is selected, the coordinate system established by the main spindle and the
sub spindle base is created in addition to the coordinate system by the main spindle and the tur-
ret. Therefore, G codes to switch the coordinate system become necessary.
G code designating the turret coordinate system : G13
G code designating the sub spindle base coordinate system : G14

• The program for the G13 side can be created in the same manner as the program for nor-
mal one-saddle models. However “G13” must be designated in the starting block of the
program.
Coordinate System to be Selected Commanded Code
Main spindle side G140
Turret G13
Sub spindle side G141
W-axis cutting using the sub spindle base G14

[Supplement]

Commands for the G14 side can be designated only when the G13 side is in the G140 mode.
W-axis commands cannot be designated when the G13 side is in the G141 mode.
At the G14 side, only the following commands can be designated.

a. W-axis commands

Rapid feed : G00

Cutting feed : G01 G94 (feed per minute)
G95 (feed per revolution)
LE32114R0100600400001

b. Synchronizing P command
A P command is used for synchronizing the execution of the commands designated in
the G13 side.

c. S and M commands for the main spindle

These commands must match with those designated in the G13 side.

d. Sub spindle chuck open/close commands

M248: Sub spindle chuck close
M249: Sub spindle chuck open
 5262-E P-194
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

(3) Sub Spindle Rotation Commands from the G14 Side

When a drill is mounted to the sub spindle and a workpiece clamped by the main spindle chuck
is drilled using the W-axis cutting function, the sub spindle in the G14 mode can be regarded as
the M-tool in multi-machining models. Therefore, the commands for the sub spindle in the G14
mode with the W-axis cutting function active should be as follows.

a. Sub spindle rotation commands

M12: Sub spindle stop
M13: Sub spindle (M-tool) forward rotation
M14: Sub spindle (M-tool) reverse rotation

b. Sub spindle speed command

SB={{{

c. Sub spindle motor winding change-over commands

M241: Sub spindle motor low-speed winding (only for sub spindle VAC motor models)
M242: Sub spindle high-speed winding (only for sub spindle VAC motor models)
 5262-E P-195
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

6. Programming

6-1. Coordinate System

6-1-1. Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Values

To move a cutting tool to a target position, the coordinate system must first be established and then
the target position specified by the coordinate values in the established coordinate system. There
are three kinds of coordinate systems as shown below and in a program, target points are all speci-
fied by the coordinate values in the program coordinate system.

• Sensor coordinate system

• Machine coordinate system

• Program coordinate system

In the case of a sub spindle model, the spindle to be used for machining is selected meeting the
desired operation. Whichever spindle is selected, positioning is always executed by the movements
of the X- and Z-axis of the turret. Since only one pair of X- and Z-axis actually exist, three is only
one sensor coordinate system and machine coordinate system. However, a program coordinate
system can be established for the main spindle and the sub spindle independently, and the program
coordinate system is automatically selected according to the selection of the spindle mode.

6-1-2. Program Coordinate System

A program coordinate system is used as the reference coordinate system for programming. For a
sub spindle model, each of the spindle has its own program coordinate system and zero offset can
be set independently. Note that the Z-axis direction of the program coordinate system established
for the sub spindle is opposite to that of the machine coordinate system.
The axis direction in the program coordinate for sub spindle can be selected as required using the
mirror image function. The B-axis rotating direction used for B-axis positioning command generally
depends on the Y-axis direction. For MACTURN and MULTUS series, its direction is uniformly deter-
mined as described below.
On the main spindle side, CCW rotation facing the turret is regarded as the B-axis positive
direction.
On the sub spindle side, CW rotation facing the turret is regarded as the B-axis positive direc-
tion.
 5262-E P-196
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

6-1-3. Coordinate System Selection

(1) One-saddle Models
G codes are used to select the coordinate system.
The coordinate system should be selected by specifying appropriate G code in the starting
block of the program. Note that the block containing the coordinate system selection G code
must not contain other commands.
Coordinate System Selection G Code
Spindle 1 coordinate system G140
Spindle 2 coordinate system G141

[Supplement]

At the beginning of a program, either of the spindle selection G codes must be specified.

(2) Two-saddle Models

Specify the coordinate system selection G code in the block immediately after the block where a
saddle selection G code (G13/G14) is specified.
For B-turret, only the main spindle can be selected. At the G14 (B-turret) side, it is not neces-
sary to specify a spindle selection G code since the spindle mode at the G14 side is fixed at the
G140 (main spindle) mode.

6-1-4. Cautions on Switching the Spindle Modes

It is not allowed to switch the spindle mode in the following states.

• Incremental programming mode

• Nose-R compensation mode

• LAP (automatic programming) mode

• Constant surface speed control mode

• Buffering arbitrary-angle chamfering sequences

 5262-E P-197
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

6-2. Program Commands

Only a difference between programming for standard models and sub spindle models is whether or
not a spindle mode selection G code that calls the corresponding coordinate system is specified at
the beginning of a program. Concerning the programming in the coordinate system called by the
spindle mode selection G code, there are no differences from the programming for standard models.
For two-saddle models, if the same spindle mode is selected for both of the turrets, programming
can be made in the same manner as for standard two-saddle models. If different spindle modes are
selected, programming can be made in the same manner as programming for one-saddle models.

6-2-1. Commands

Basic codes and commands used for programming such as G codes, M codes, S commands, T
commands, and fixed cycle commands are the same as those used for standard models. In addition
to these codes and commands, the functions specific to the sub spindle models can be used.

6-2-2. Functions Specific to the Sub Spindle Models

The sub spindle models have the unique feature in workpiece transfer between the two spindles so
that integrated multiple-processes operation can be performed in one machine. The functions indi-
cated below are provided to implement this feature effectively.

(1) W-axis Commands

The relative position of the sub spindle to the main spindle can be controlled using W-axis com-
mands.
For W-axis movement control, either the G00 (positioning) or the G01 (linear interpolation; cut-
ting feed) can be used.
<G code>
G00.....Positioning
G01.....Linear interpolation
<Format>
G00 W
GG01 W F

[Supplement]

In the linear interpolation (G01) mode, designation of both G94 (feed per minute) and G95 (feed
per revolution) are possible. In the G94 (feed per minute) mode, however, W-axis feedrate is
controlled based on the main spindle speed.
For one–saddle model, the main spindle mode must always be selected.
For two–saddle model, selection of the spindle mode is possible at both of the G13 and G14
sides. However, both of G13 and G14 sides must select the main spindle (G140).
For two-saddle model, it is necessary to specify which of the W-axis commands (commands at
the G13 side or G14 side) is valid to avoid problems caused by W-axis commands specified at
both sides by mistake.
G122...W-axis commands may be specified only at the G13 side.
G123...W-axis commands may be specified only at the G14 side.
Designation of G122 and G123 must be synchronized in the G13 and G14 side programs.
At power on, the G122 mode is valid.
 5262-E P-198
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

(2) Main/Sub Spindle Synchronized Rotation Command

Using the synchronized rotation command, it is possible to match the sub spindle state (speed,
rotation direction, phase) with the main spindle state. In the synchronized control mode, it is not
necessary to specify the spindle speed and rotation commands for the sub spindle.
<M code>
M150...Synchronized rotation mode cancel
M151...Synchronized rotation mode ON

[Supplement]

The synchronized rotation command can be issued even if the spindle to be synchronized is
rotating. In this case the spindle rotates in the same way before the synchronization rotation com-
mand was issued when the synchronized rotation command is canceled.

[Supplement]

If a synchronized rotation command is specified without workpiece, the sub spindle may cause
“DIFF over alarm”. This is because the NC judges that a workpiece is gripped when the sub-spin-
dle side chuck is closed during synchronized rotation and limits the torque on the sub-spindle
side. This alarm does not occur when both main and sub spindles grip the same workpiece and
are physically connected.

(3) Opposing Spindle Chuck Open/Close Command

This command is used to open/close the chuck of the spindle opposite to the presently selected
spindle mode.
<M code>
M248...Opposing spindle chuck close command
M249...Opposing spindle chuck open command

(4) Opposing Spindle Chuck Open/Close Interlock Release Command

By releasing the opposing spindle chuck operation interlock, it is possible to open/close the
chuck of the opposite spindle mode.
<M code>
M246...Opposing spindle chuck open/close interlock release OFF
M247...Opposing spindle chuck open/close interlock release ON

(5) Opposing Spindle Air Blow Command

This command is used to turn ON/OFF the spindle air blow for the spindle mode opposite to the
presently selected spindle mode.
<M code>
M288...Opposing spindle air blow OFF
M289...Opposing spindle air blow ON

6-2-3. System Variables

System variables are used in common to all coordinate systems. Therefore, if system variables
which have the coordinate system dependent data are used, a program must be written ensuring
that the objective coordinate system is selected when entering such system variables in a program.
For data input/output operation using system variables, the data of the selected coordinate system
is input/output.
 5262-E P-199
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

7. Data Operation

7-1. Zero Setting

For the sub spindle models, a programming zero can be set for each of the coordinate systems
which are defined by the combination of G13, G14, G140, and G141.
For one-saddle machines, it is not necessary to specify G13/G14.
Zero offset and zero shift of the W-axis can be set for the A-turret and B-turret side independently.

LE32114R0100600500001
 5262-E P-200
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

7-1-1. Zero Offset

(1) Coordinate System at Spindle 1 Side
Set the program zero of the coordinate system established for the spindle 1.
Set also the zero point of the W-axis which is used for W-axis operation.
Although the setting can be made in the same manner as setting the zero point data for the
standard specification machines, it is necessary to ensure that the main spindle mode is
selected. When the main spindle mode is selected, the lamp in the [MAIN SPINDLE] button at
the option panel lights.
Note that the W-axis zero offset defines the program coordinate system of the sub spindle in
reference to the main spindle and, therefore, it is not influenced by the turret position at all.

(2) Coordinate System at Spindle 2

Set the programming zero of the coordinate system established by the turret and the spindle 2.
In the spindle 2 mode, set the Z-axis direction offset value of the tool nose position in reference
to the sub spindle for the Z-axis zero offset data. Since the sub spindle can move in the Z-axis
direction, if the sub spindle is moved after the Z-axis zero offset is set, the Z-axis zero offset
value is automatically corrected by the moved distance.
The data necessary for automatic offset data correction is automatically set for the W-axis
machine coordinate system zero offset when the Z-axis zero offset is set.

(3) Two-saddle Models

For the two-saddle models, set the program zero of the coordinate system established by the B-
turret and the spindle 1 in addition to the program setting explained in items (1), (2) and (3).
The W-axis zero point should also be set here for executing a W-axis command from the G14
side.
Note that the W-axis zero offset defines the program coordinate system of the sub spindle in
reference to the main spindle and, therefore, it is not influenced by the B-turret position at all.

7-1-2. Setting the Offset Data

Procedure :

1 Select the manual mode.

2 Select the coordinate system for which the zero point is set.
Turret selection key [A/B for 2-saddle model)
“Sub spindle selection” key [MAIN SPINDLE/SUB-SPINDLE] (on the option panel)

3 Move the axes to the desired position using the SLIDE JOG buttons or the pulse handle.

4 Select the zero setting mode.

5 Select the axis for which zero point is set using the function key [AXIS CHANGE] and cursor
control keys.

6 Set the data using the function keys [F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD), or [F3] (CALC).

7 Set the zero offset data in the other coordinate systems by repeating the above procedure.
 5262-E P-201
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

7-1-3. Setting the Zero Offset Data/Zero Shift Data for X–/Z–axis in the Sub Spindle
Mode

Procedure :

1 Select the zero setting mode.

2 Select [MAIN SPINDLE/SUB-SPINDLE] by using the Sub spindle selection” key.

3 For the X-axis zero offset, set the distance (1) from the machine zero to the program zero point.
For the Z-axis zero offset, which differs according to the W-axis position, move the Z-axis so
that the tool nose of the reference tool is in contact with the workpiece end face as shown in
Fig. 5-1 and press function key [F3] (CAL).

X+

Turret

Sub-spindle

Program zero

W-axis machine zero

W+
(1)
(3)

(2)

Z+
Turret machine zero
LE32114R0100600530001

Fig.4-2 When Program Zero is Set at Left End Face of Workpiece

To set the program zero at the left end face of a workpiece as shown in Fig. 7-1, press the function
key [F3] (CAL), and then press the WRITE key. The Z-axis actual value (2) from the machine zero is
set for ZERO OFFSET of Z. At the same time, the difference (2) - (3) between the value (2) and the
W-axis actual value (3) from the machine zero is set at the system parameter “Z-axis machine zero
offset”.
To set the program zero at the right end face of a workpiece as shown in Fig. 7-2, the workpiece
length (4) must be added to the offset value. The procedure is as follows:
 5262-E P-202
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

Procedure :

1 Press the function key [F3] (CAL), enter the value (4), and then press the WRITE key.

X+

Turret

Program zero Sub-spindle

W-axis machine zero

W+
(1)
(3)

(2) (4)

Z+
Turret machine zero
LE32114R0100600530002

Fig.4-3 Setting Program Zero at Right End Face of Workpiece

In this operation, the value {(2) + (4)} is set for the Z-axis zero offset.
At the same time, the difference from value (3) {(2) + (4) - (3)} is set for the Z-axis zero offset
(system parameter). That is, the machine zero offset is the relative value of the Z-axis zero off-
set in reference to the W-axis position. This allows the Z-axis zero offset to be automatically
calculated by the NC from the W-axis position and the Z-axis machine zero offset even when
the W-axis position changes.

[Supplement]

The Z-axis zero offset in the sub-spindle mode automatically changes as the movement of
the W-axis.
 5262-E P-203
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8. Description of Parameters
Since the basic data setting method in the parameter setting mode is the same as used for setting
the data of standard machines, refer to the PART IV. “PARAMETERS” in OSP Operation Manual for
the procedure for setting the parameters.
When the coordinate values are set using the calculation function, however, the data valid in the
selected operation mode is used.
Therefore, if data is calculated based on the coordinate values of the Z- and W-axis in the machine
coordinate system in the state the spindle selected in the active operation mode and the spindle
mode selected in the data setting mode differ, the data will not be calculated correctly. To set the
data using the calculation function, be sure to select the manual operation mode and select the
coordinate system where data will be set before proceeding with the data setting steps using the
CAL key.
An error occurs if the spindle selected in the data setting mode and the spindle mode selected in the
operation mode differ from each other. Concerning the setting and addition operation, it is not nec-
essary to pay attention to the operation mode.

8-1. System Parameters

The system parameters that are added for this specification are indicated below.
For the parameters not explained below, refer to OSP Operation Manual.

• +STROKE END LIMIT (W)

• -STROKE END LIMIT (W)

• BACKLASH (W)

• PR ZERO OFFSET (W)

• MC ZERO OFFSET (W)

• TORQUE VALUE (W)

LE32114R0100600550001
 5262-E P-204
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8-2. User Parameters

User parameters can be set for each of the three coordinate systems.
The desired coordinate system should be selected using the turret selection key ([A], [B]) and the
spindle selection key (SUB SPINDLE MODE).
The initial settings and setting ranges for each of the entries on this screen are as follows.

• VARIABLE LIMIT
The variable soft-limits determine the stroke range of the X (Z) axis in accordance with the
workpiece.
They can be used to set the turret indexing position, prevent inappropriate positioning due to
programming errors, and protect the chuck and tailstock.
Variable soft-limits are set for both the positive and negative axis directions. They cannot be set
outside the stroke end limits.
Initial Setting Setting Range Setting Units
Depends on the machine
-99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system
specifications

[Supplement]

1) When using a machine with the two-saddle specification, select the parameter screens for
each saddle control axis with the turret selection keys. When using a machine with the multi-
ple machining specification, some setting fields relating to the C-axis are displayed but since
the C-axis is a rotary axis it requires no variable soft-limit settings.
2) Variable soft-limit settings can be made either in reference to the program zero (P) or the
machine zero (M).

• Droop
The servo follow-up function of the feed axes has a fundamental lag (DIFF) with respect to func-
tion generation. Due to this lag, particularly during high-speed cutting, droop is generated at
corners. This droop can be reduced by program commands and parameter settings.
Initial Setting Setting Range Setting Units
Linear axis 10 (µm)
0 to 1.000 Selected unit system
C-axis 0.07 (deg)
 5262-E P-205
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8-3. Chuck Parameters

The chuck data of the chuck on the main spindle is set for the standard chuck/tailstock spindle
parameters.
For the second spindle chuck, set the parameter data using the following screens.

LE32114R0100600570001

The settings made on the CHUCK parameter screen are explained below.

• CHUCK HOLD CHANGE

Select OD or ID chucking.
Initial setting OD-GRIP

• CHUCK/CENTER WORK CHANGE

Select chuck work or center work.
Initial setting CHUCK WORK

• CHUCK BARRIER
The chuck barrier function allows an area into which the tool cannot enter to be set in accor-
dance with the shape of the chuck. The chuck barrier check can be switched ON and OFF by
program commands (M codes) so that it is performed only when necessary during cutting.
Code Description
L Chuck jaw length
D Chuck jaw size
L1 Chuck jaw gripping length
D1 Chuck jaw gripping face width
CX Chuck gripping diameter
CZ Distance from program zero
 5262-E P-206
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

[Supplement]

1) The chuck barrier is set in the program coordinate system. Therefore, the shifting of the Z-
axis program zero when the workpiece changes causes the barrier area to shift accordingly.
2) If the chuck barrier is set outside the variable soft-limit area, the variable soft-limit defines the
chuck barrier at that location.
3) When the NC control software is installed, the initial settings are set for all the chuck barrier
data.
4) The only barrier data for which [F3] [CAL] in the function menu can be used are jaw positions
CX and CZ. For all other data, use [F1] (SET) or [F2] (ADD).

[Supplement]

Even when a two-saddle specification machine is being used, only one set of CX/CZ jaw position
data can be set. This makes it impossible to perform a chuck barrier check if the program zeros
at saddle A and saddle B are at different physical positions.
 5262-E P-207
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8-4. Machine System Parameter (Airblow/Coolant)

For one set of M codes which control air blow and coolant outputs, the OSP provides two outputs.
These outputs can be changed over according to the coordinate system in which control commands
are specified.
The settings made on the AIRBLOW/COOLANT parameter screen are explained below.

• Airblow A (M89/M88) output selection

Select the type of output for airblow A (M89/M88).
0 : Fixed as first airblow A
1 : Fixed as second airblow A
2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)
G13 side: First airblow A output
G14 side: Second airblow A output
3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)
G140 side: First airblow A output
G141 side: Second airblow A output

Initial setting Setting Range

0 0 to 3

• Airblow B (M51/M50) output selection

Select the type of output for airblow B (M51/M50).
0 : Fixed as first airblow B
1 : Fixed as second airblow B
2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)
G13 side: First airblow B output
G14 side: Second airblow B output
3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)
G140 side: First airblow B output
G141 side: Second airblow B output

Initial setting Setting Range

0 0 to 3

• Airblow C (M155/M154) output selection

Select the type of output for airblow C (M155/M154).
0 : Fixed as first airblow C
1 : Fixed as second airblow C
2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)
G13 side: First airblow C output
G14 side: Second airblow C output
3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)
G140 side: First airblow C output
G141 side: Second airblow C output

Initial setting Setting Range

0 0 to 3
 5262-E P-208
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

• Airblow D (M127/M126) output selection

Select the type of output for airblow D (M127/M126).
0 : Fixed as first airblow D
1 : Fixed as second airblow D
2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)
G13 side: First airblow D output
G14 side: Second airblow D output
3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)
G140 side: First airblow D output
G141 side: Second airblow D output

Initial setting Setting Range

0 0 to 3

• Airblow E (M219/M218) output selection

Select the type of output for airblow E (M218/M219).
0 : Fixed as first airblow E
1 : Fixed as second airblow E
2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)
G13 side: First airblow E output
G14 side: Second airblow E output
3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)
G140 side: First airblow E output
G141 side: Second airblow E output

Initial setting Setting Range

0 0 to 3

• Coolant 1 (M09/M08) ouput selection

Select the type of output for coolant 1 (M09/M08).
0 : Fixed as first coolant 1 output
1 : Fixed as second coolant 1 output
2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)
G13 side: First coolant 1 output
G14 side: Second coolant 1 output
3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)
G140 side: First coolant 1 output
G141 side: Second coolant 1 output

Initial setting Setting Range

0 0 to 3
 5262-E P-209
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

• Coolant 2 (M145/M144) output selection

Select the type of output for coolant 2 (M145/M144).
0 : Fixed as first coolant 2 output
1 : Fixed as second coolant 2 output
2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)
G13 side: First coolant 2 output
G14 side: Second coolant 2 output
3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)
G140 side: First coolant 2 output
G141 side: Second coolant 2 output

Initial setting Setting Range

0 0 to 3

• Coolant 3 (M175/M174) output selection

Select the type of output for coolant 3 (M175/M174).
0 : Fixed as first coolant 3 output
1 : Fixed as second coolant 3 output
2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)
G13 side: First coolant 3 output
G14 side: Second coolant 3 output
3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)
G140 side: First coolant 3 output
G141 side: Second coolant 3 output

Initial setting Setting Range

0 0 to 2

• Coolant 4 (M440/M439) output selection

Selects as the output condition of Coolant 4 (M440/M439).
0 : Coolant 4 is always used for spindle No. 1.
1 : Coolant 4 is always used for spindle No. 2.
2 : Coolant 4 is used for the turret selected (by G13/G14).
G13 side: Coolant 4 is used for spindle No. 1.
G14 side: Coolant 4 is used for spindle No. 2.
3 : Conforms to the turret selected (by G140/G141)
G140 side: Coolant 4 is used for spindle No. 1.
G141 side: Coolant 4 is used for spindle No. 2.

• High-pressure coolant output selection (Coolant 1 to 4)

Determines whether the high-pressure coolant is used or not for each of the coolants 1 to 4.
Initial Setting (No check mark)

• Thru-spindle coolant clogged filter detection ineffective

Disables detection of clogged filter in the through-spindle coolant system.
Initial Setting (No check mark)

• Turret index delay for high press. coolant

Set the waiting time after high-pressure coolant is stopped until the turret indexing is started.
Initial Setting Setting Range Setting Unit
200 1 to 990 0.01 s
 5262-E P-210
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8-5. Machine User Parameter (Airblow/Coolant)

By the setting of a parameter, it is possible to jog the spindle while the air blow command is exe-
cuted. If the parameter setting is so made that air blow 1 is always output disregarding the active
coordinate system, the main spindle jogs. If air blow 2 is always output due to the setting of the
parameter, the sub spindle jogs.
The settings made on the AIRBLOW/COOLANT parameter screen are explained below.

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow A

Set the check mark to jog the spindle when an M89 command is given.
Initial setting No check mark

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow B

Set the check mark to jog the spindle when an M51 command is given.
Initial setting No check mark

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow C

Set the check mark to jog the spindle when an M155 command is given.
Initial setting No check mark

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow D

Set the check mark to jog the spindle when an M127 command is given.
Initial setting No check mark

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow E

Set the spindle to jog the spindle when an M219 command is given.
Initial setting No check mark
 5262-E P-211
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8-6. Machine User Parameter (Chuck)

The settings made on the CHUCK parameter screen are explained below.

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle chuck clamp answer timer

Set the time lapse after the chuck clamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the clamp-
ing operation is considered completed when a chuck clamp command is given.
Initial setting Setting Range
100 0 to 1000

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle chuck unclamp answer timer

Set the time lapse after the chuck unclamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the
unclamping operation is considered completed when a chuck unclamp command is given.
Initial setting Setting Range
100 0 to 1000

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle chucking miss detect start timer

On machines featuring the chucking error detection specification, Set the time lapse after the
chucking error detection air output coming ON that the chucking error pressure input is con-
firmed.
Initial setting Setting Range
300 0 to 60000

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle air chuck clamp answer timer

Set the time lapse after the chuck clamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the clamp
operation is considered completed when an air chuck clamp command is given.
Initial setting Setting Range
500 0 to 1000

• Air chuck unclamp answer timer

Set the time lapse after the chuck unclamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the
unclamp operation is considered completed when an air chuck unclamp command is given.
Initial setting Setting Range
500 0 to 1000

• Opposite M command effective in chuck moving

Set the check mark to specify the following: if, before completion of the operation specified by
an M83 or M84 command given together with an M64 command, an M code command specify-
ing an opposite operation is given, this opposite operation will be performed without waiting for
completion of the current operation.
Initial setting No check mark

• Chuck interlock effective

Set effective/ineffective of alarm check for “1st spindle chuck interlock/” signal when the chuck
clamp/unclamp command is executed (when chuck is operating). Alarm check is effective
when check mark is entered.
Initial setting No check mark
 5262-E P-212
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8-7. Machine User Parameter (Spindle)

For the spindle related parameters, separate screens are provided for the main and the sub spindle.
Therefore, when setting parameters, make sure that the displayed screen is for the desired spindle.
The settings made on the SPINDLE parameter screen are explained below.

(1) Page 1/2 (1ST SPINDLE), Page 2/2 (2ND SPINDLE)

• Allowable chuck rotation speed

Set the maximum chuck rotation speed for the chuck used.
Initial setting Setting Range
0 0 to Maximum chuck rotation speed

• Inching speed
Set the spindle speed when a spindle jog command is given.
Initial setting Setting Range
40 1500

• No Spindle stop with M00/M01/M02/M30

Set the check mark to prevent the spindle being stopped by M00/M01/M02/M30 com-
mands.
Initial setting No check mark

• Orientation direction CW
Set the check mark to make the direction of rotation of the spindle when it is oriented from
the stopped state “clockwise.”
Initial setting No check mark

• Orientation direction CCW

Set the check mark to make the direction of rotation spindle when it is oriented from the
stopped state “counterclockwise.”
Initial setting No check mark

• Orientation answer timer

Set the time lapse after reaching the target angle range before a spindle orientation opera-
tion is considered to be completed.
Initial setting Setting Range
20 0 to 9999

• Orientation electric type select (pin/brake)

Set the check mark when not using the pin input/output signals or brake input/output sig-
nals with the pin type or brake type orientation function.
Initial setting No check mark

• No orientation cancel with M02/M30 (electric)

Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after execution of M02/M30 when
using the electrically controlled orientation function.
Initial setting No check mark
 5262-E P-213
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

• No orientation cancel with operation mode change (electric)

Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after the operation mode is
changed (between automatic/MDI and manual) when using the electrically controlled orien-
tation function.
Initial setting No check mark

• No orientation cancel with NC reset (electric)

Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after NC reset is made when
using the electrically controlled orientation function.
Initial setting No check mark

8-8. Machine System Parameter (Spindle)

The settings made on the SPINDLE parameter screen are explained below.

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle oscillation speed

Set the oscillation speed when the spindle gear speed range is changed. (Spindle override is
ineffective.)
Initial setting Setting Range
40 1 to 500

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle torque limit value

Set the limit value for motor torque when the spindle is accelerating or decelerating. By reduc-
ing this value it is possible to restrict the current flow to the spindle motor during acceleration
and deceleration.
Initial setting Setting Range
100 40 to 100

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle S command cancel by M02/M30

When an M02/M30 command is executed, the S command value effective up to that point is
cancelled.
Initial setting Check mark set
 5262-E P-214
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8-9. Machine System Parameter (Door Interlock)

The settings made on the DOOR INTERLOCK parameter screen are described below.

• Allowable 1st spindle/2nd spindle maximum speed

Even when the door interlock is ON, spindle speeds generated by spindle jog, oscillation, or ori-
entation commands do not cause an alarm if they are within the setting for this parameter.
Initial setting Setting Range
50 0 to 50

• Feed axis maximum speed

Set the maximum feedrate when the door is open, which will apply even under conditions other
than the following: [DOOR INTERLOCK] switch OFF and automatic operation mode and single
block mode not selected.
Initial setting Setting Range
2000000 0 to 2000000

• Allowable Milling spindle maximum speed A-side/B-side

Set the maximum spindle speed generated by M-tool spindle jog, oscillation, or orientation com-
mands that will not cause an alarm even when the door interlock is ON.
Initial setting Setting Range
50 0 to 50

• Door lock release timer

For a machine equipped with the mechanical lock type manual door opening/closing mecha-
nism, set the time lapse after pressing the mechanical lock switch lock release button before the
lock of the mechanical lock switch is released.
Initial setting Setting Range
0 0 to 9999
 5262-E P-215
SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

8-10. Machine System Parameter (Milling Spindle)

The settings made on the MILLING SPINDLE parameter screen are explained below.

(1) Page 1/2 (A-SIDE) and page 2/2 (B-SIDE)

• Oscillation speed
Set the M-axis oscillation speed when the M-axis gear speed range is changed.
Initial setting Setting Range
40 30 to 500

• Torque limit value

MSet the limit value for motor torque when the M-axis is accelerating or decelerating. By
reducing this value it is possible to restrict the current flow to the M-tool spindle motor dur-
ing acceleration and deceleration.
Initial setting Setting Range
100 40 to 100

• SB command cancel by M02/M30

When an M02/M30 command is executed, the S command value effective up to that point
is cancelled.
Initial setting Check mark set

• Number of oscillation (for clutch connection)

If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the number
of M-axis oscillations for engaging the clutch for this parameter.
Initial setting Setting Range
1 0 to 50

• Oscillation speed (for clutch connection)

If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the M-axis
oscillation speed when engaging the clutch.
Initial setting Setting Range
50 0 to 1000

• Oscillation timer (for clutch connection)

If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the M-axis
oscillation time when engaging the clutch.
Initial setting Setting Range
1 0 to 10
 5262-E P-216
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

The NC tailstock function is used to automatically position the tailstock by providing the feed axis for the
tailstock.
The machine supports the workpiece by driving the motor of the tailstock.
The tailstock supports the workpiece with the built-in screw thrust after moving to the work position and
braking.
The tailstock is equipped with W-axis programming zero and variable limit since the tailstock is controlled as
the W-axis.

Spring

- Negative variable limit + Positive variable limit

W-axis zero

Sizing position Approach Retract Retraction end

Sizing position Approach Retract Retraction end

3 (Approach feed) 2 (Rapid traverse) 1 (Rapid traverse)

4 (Rapid traverse) 5 (Rapid traverse)

LE32114R0100700010001
 5262-E P-217
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

1. Operation
The tailstock can be operated by either of the two methods.

1-1. Setup Operation

The operator must set the sizing position of each workpiece even in setup operation.
When cutting workpieces having different lengths, set the sizing position according to the workpiece
length. The sizing position is used for reference so that the tailstock can properly contact with the
workpiece.
In this case, the work position must be set with manual operation in the teaching mode.
(In the teaching mode, the “Teaching” button lamp turns ON and the beep sounds repeatedly.) Refer
to 5-1. “Setting the Sizing Position” for how to set the work position.

Operation range with the teaching mode ON: Negative variable limit to Positive limit

1-2. Ordinary Operation

In the ordinary operation, the workpiece is changed and re-supported.
In this case, turn off the teaching mode and advance the tailstock in inching mode by the M-code
command or manual operation so that the workpiece is supported with an appropriate thrust.

Operation range with the teaching mode OFF: Sizing position to Positive variable limit (retraction
end)
 5262-E P-218
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

2. Tailstock Movement

2-1. Manual Tailstock Movement

Press the “TAILSTOCK W-” or “TAILSTOCK W+” on the additional panel or use the foot pedal when
manually moving the tailstock.

LE32114R0100700050001

The procedure to execute the work position command by using the foot pedal is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Move the X-axis to the + limit to prevent interference.

2 Stop the spindle.

3 Turn the teaching mode OFF by manually pressing the “Teaching Mode” button on the
additional panel.
(The teaching mode is turned off when the “Teaching” button lamp turns off and the beep stops
sounding.)

4 Move the tailstock to the sizing position at the retraction side from the approach position and
the second step of the foot pedal advance for manual operation.

5 When the tailstock finishes moving to the sizing position, the “Sizing position” lamp turns ON
and the beep sounds.

2-2. Automatic Tailstock Movement

The tailstock is moved with the M-code command.
The M code command is executed when the teaching mode is turned off.
M56 ...... Tailstock Sizing position Command
M55 ...... Tailstock Retract Position Command
M847 ...... Tailstock Retraction End Position Command
 5262-E P-219
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

3. Switching between High/Low Pressure

3-1. Switching between High/Low Pressure Command

The high/low pressure is switched with the M code command.
M98 ...... High pressure command
M99 ...... High pressure command

3-2. Operation
(1) Operation when executing the high/low switching command while positioning the workpiece.
The workpiece is supported with the shrunken internal spring while the tailstock is in sizing
position mode.

LE32114R0100700080001

When the low pressure command is issued, the thrust is reduced by retracting the tailstock and
expanding the internal spring.

LE32114R0100700080002

When the high pressure command is issued, the thrust is reduced by advancing the tailstock
and shrinking the internal spring.

LE32114R0100700080003

(2) Operation when executing the high/low pressure switching command while the machine is not
in sizing position mode
The tailstock does not operate with the high/low pressure switching command. It operates with
the commanded thrust when the sizing position command is issued or the second step for the
foot pedal advance is pedaled.
 5262-E P-220
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

4. Multiple Sizing Position Command

A maximum of 10 positions can be set when the position or thrust is changed due to the workpiece
length and blank, etc.
(Refer to 6. “Parameters”.)
The multiple IN positions can be selected on the program.

4-1. Multiple Sizing Position Command

The multiple sizing position command is executed with the G code command.

G195 SP=@@ @@= Multiple Sizing position No.

<Program Example>
N001 G00 X1000 Moves the X-axis to the + limit.
N002 G195 SP=1 Multiple Sizing position command (No.1 command)
N003 M56 Sizing position command (moving to the No.1 sizing position)
N004 M3 S1000
:
N100 M5
N101 M55 Retract position command (moving to the No.1 retract position)
LE32114R0100700100001

4-2. Operation
The tailstock moves to the position of the multiple sizing position number commanded when the
multiple IN position command and tailstock operation command are executed.

4-3. Sequence Restoration (operation starting from the halfway of the

program)
When the multiple sizing position numbers and the tailstock positions used before sequence
restoration and after restoration are not matched, sequence restoration is disabled.
 5262-E P-221
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

5. Preparatory Operation

5-1. Setting the Sizing Position

Since the tailstock moves to the “sizing position”, an appropriate thrust cannot be obtained if the
“Sizing Position” is not set correctly. The “Sizing Position” must be changed if the workpiece length
changes.
The procedure to set the “Sizing position” is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Move the X-axis to the positive limit to prevent interference.

2 Stop the spindle.

3 Turn the teaching mode ON by manually pressing the Teaching Mode button on the additional
panel.

4 Press the NC TAILSTOCK button on the additional panel with manual operation to display the
NC TAILSTOCK PARAMETER screen. (Refer to 6. “Parameters.”)

5 Set the position on which the workpiece does not contact to APPROACH.

6 Set the thrust to LOW or HIGH.

7 Moves the tailstock to the sizing position by using the second step for foot pedal advance at the
position located at the retraction side viewed from the approach position.

8 Moves the cursor to the “SIZING POSITION” and press the function key (CAL) when the
tailstock is moved to the sizing position and the SIZING POSITION lamp is turned on.
The position on which the tailstock contacts with the workpiece is entered in “Sizing position”
when the CAL button is pressed (the position positioned before the internal spring slackens
and the workpeice end face position are set.)

9 Set “-OK” and “+OK” for both side of the sizing position to judge the availability of the sizing
position.

[Supplement]

The NC tailstock function detects the motor torque and supports the workpiece with
appropriate thrust.
Therefore, the “APPROACH” must be set to at least 2 mm from the “+ OK” in the retraction
side (+ side) in order to prevent false detection of the acceleration torque for the motor.
 5262-E P-222
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

5-2. No-load Torque Measurement

The NC tailstock generates appropriate thrust by controlling the motor torque.
Since the torque is lost to other than thrust due to slide resistance, the torque must be measured in
advance and the load must be monitored after subtracting the measured load from the motor torque.
The procedure to measure the no-load torque is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Move the X-axis to the + limit to prevent interference.

2 Stop the spindle.

3 Press the NC TAILSTOCK button on the additional panel with manual operation to open the
NC TAILSTOCK PARAMETER screen. (Refer to 6. “Parameters.”)

4 Set the position on which the workpiece does not contact to APPROACH.

5 Select “1. Tailstock slideway resistance teaching ON” on the second page.

6 Press the TAILSTOCK W- button on the additional panel for manual operation at the retraction
side viewed from the approach position to move the tailstock for 5 mm with the sizing position
speed. In this case, the tailstock returns to the previous position.
Once the tailstock slideway resistance teaching is executed, the “1. Tailstock slideway
resistance teaching ON” is automatically turned off.
 5262-E P-223
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

6. Parameters

6-1. NC Tailstock User Parameter

Press the function selection key NC TAILSTOCK on the optional panel to open the
following one screen operation pop-up window.

[First page]

(2) Sizing position Number Display

(3) Diagnosis Display (1) Tailstock Current Position Display

(5) Command Position Display (4) Thrust Display

LE32114R0100700150001

(1) Tailstock Current Position Display

The current position of the program coordinate for the tailstock axis (W-axis) appears.

(2) Sizing position Number Display

The currently selected number appears with the multiple sizing position command (G195 SP= 1
to 10). This display appears when the multiple sizing position command and the tailstock
movement command are executed.

(3) Diagnosis Display

When the tailstock enters sizing position status with the sizing position command, the message
“The tailstock reaches the sizing position and thrust.” appears.

(4) Thrust Display

The currently commanded thrust appears.
If the same value is set for “HIGH” and “LOW”, only “low” appears.
 5262-E P-224
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

(5) Command Position Display

a. Sizing position...Input the sizing position for the tailstock with program coordinate systems.
When the [CAL] button is pressed, the position where the tailstock touches a workpiece is
input.

b. -OK...Input the - side range of the sizing position of the tailstock.

The amount of displacement from the sizing position is set.

c. +OK...Input the + side range of the sizing position of the tailstock.

The amount of displacement from the sizing position is set.

d. Approach Position...Input the approach position for the tailstock with program coordinate
systems.

e. Retract position...Input the retract position for the tailstock with program coordinate
systems.

f. Low...Input the tailstock thrust for low pressure side.

g. High...Input the tailstock thrust for high pressure side.

Initial Value Setting Range Setting Range

a) Sizing position 0.000 -99999.999 to 99999.999
b) -OK 0.000 0.000 to 9.999
c) +OK 0.000 0.000 to 9.999
d) Approach Position 0.000 -99999.999 to 99999.999
e) Retract position 0.000 -99999.999 to 99999.999
f) Low 0.0 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0
g) High 0.0 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0
 5262-E P-225
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

[Second Page]

LE32114R0100700150002

(1) Tailstock slideway resistance teaching ON

Set this parameter when measuring no load motor torque.
When the “TAILSTOCK W-” button on the additional panel for manual operation is pressed or
the first step of the foot pedal advance is pedaled at the retraction side viewed from the
approach position while this parameter is set, the tailstock moves for 5 mm with the sizing
position speed. In this case, the tailstock returns to the previous position.
Once the tailstock slideway resistance is taught, the “1. Tailstock slideway resistance teaching
ON” is automatically turned off.
 5262-E P-226
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

[Third page]

Spindle 5 Spindle 4 Spindle 3 Spindle 2 Spindle 1

LE32114R0100700150003

(1) Speed 1
Set the movement speed from the retraction end to the retract position.

(2) Speed 2
Set the movement speed from the retraction end to the approach position.

(3) Speed 3
Set the sizing position speed.

(4) Speed 4
Set the movement speed from the sizing position to the retract position.

(5) Speed 5
Set the movement speed from the retraction end to the retract position.

(Initial Value and Upper Limit Value when Override is set to 100%.) m/min

Mode M code Pedal/JOG Pedal JOG

Door Open Close Open Close
Override
Door Interlock ON/
ON OFF ON OFF ON/OFF
OFF
1 1.2 1.2 20 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4
Valid
2 1.2 1.2 10 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4
Operation
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Invalid
No.
4 1.2 1.2 20 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4
Valid
5 1.2 1.2 20 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4
 5262-E P-227
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

6-2. NC Tailstock System Parameter

LE32114R0100700160001

(1) Tailstock Quill Expand/Shrink Time

Set the time for the spring built in the tailstock expands/shrinks (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
0.02 0.00 to 10.00 [s]

(2) Tailstock Spring Force

Set the force for the spring built in the tailstock (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
Specific to machine 1 to 10000 [N/mm]

(3) Initial Quill Spring Shrink Amount

Set the initial shrink amount of the spring built in the tailstock (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
Specific to machine 0 to 10.0 [mm]

(4) No Load Torque

Set the torque value when no load is applied to the tailstock (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
Specific to machine 0 to 99.9 [%]

(5) Ball Screw Lead

Set the ball screw lead to drive the tailstock (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
Specific to machine 1 to 100 [mm]
 5262-E P-228
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

(6) Ball Screw Efficiency

Set the ball screw efficiency to drive the tailstock (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
Specific to machine 0.01 to 1.00

(7) Motor Rated Torque

Set the motor rated torque to drive the tailstock (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
Specific to machine 1 to 10000 [Ncm]

(8) Torque Skip Position Read Delay Time

Set the servo system delay time for the torque (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
120 0 to 10000 [0.1msec]

(9) Work Touch Detect Torque

Set the threshold for detecting that the tailstock touches a workpiece (set at shipment).
Initial Value Setting Range
Specific to machine 0 to 99.9 [%]
 5262-E P-229
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

7. Interlock
(1) The alarm occurs when the operation command issued while operation conditions for the NC
tailstock are not met.

1749 Alarm A The tailstock status command is not correct

[Code]
1: The spindle is not stopped.
2: The center workpiece is not selected.
3: The M-tool spindle is not stopped.
4: The C-axis is not stopped.
5: The touch setter is not positioned at the retract position.
6: The X-axis is not positioned at + limit.
7: The tailstock is in tailstock teaching mode.

Conditions for “Stopping the Spindle”, “Stopping the M-tool spindle” and “Stopping the C-axis”
are reset with M codes used for releasing the interlock.
M167: Tailstock Interlock release ON
M168: Tailstock Interlock release OFF

2371 Alarm B There is an error in the tailstock movement command

[Code]
8: The setting value of the set selected with the multiple sizing position command is unmatched.
9: The sizing position command is executed while the brake is not released in the sizing
position area.
10: The multiple sizing positions before sequence restart is not matched with the sizing position
after sequence restart.
11: There is an error in the multiple sizing position command.
12. The NC tailstock no load torque teaching cycle command is issued at the - side viewed from
the approach position.

(2) The alarm activates when the high/low pressure switching command is executed while the high/
low pressure switching command for the NC tailstock is issued.

8584 Alarm A Conditions for switching the tailstock thrust high/low pressure is
not satisfied

[Code]
1: The spindle is rotating.
2: The M-tool spindle is rotating.
3: The C-axis is rotating.
 5262-E P-230
SECTION 5 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

(3) The alarm activates when the tailstock does not enter sizing position mode after the sizing
position command was issued.

1367 Alarm A The NC tailstock is not in sizing position status

[Code]
1: When the command position (CON) does not reach the command torque before entering the
sizing position area 1, the command torque is generated within the tailstock quill expand/shrink
Time.
2: The torque higher than the set thrust is generated when the current position (APA) is moved
to the + side viewed from the sizing position area 2.
3: The torque exceeding the threshold is generated when the tailstock moves for the time
constant (T1+T2)*1.25 + 48 msec from the approach position or movement start position.
4: The current position is not within the sizing position area while the tailstock is in sizing
position status.

2659 Alarm B The NC tailstock axis is not in sizing position status

[Code]
1: The current position (APA) is positioned at - side viewed from the sizing position area 1.
Or the torque exceeding the threshold is generated when the current position (APA) is located
at + side viewed from the sizing position area 2 with manual operation.

(4) The multiple sizing position command (G195) is issued when the NC tailstock type is not used.

2662 Alarm B There is no NC tailstock type

[Code]
None
 5262-E P-231
SECTION 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS

SECTION 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS

1. Description of Other Functions

1-1. Override for Internal Arc Cutting

In the cutter radius compensation mode, feedrate is controlled so that the feedrate along the tool
center path will be the feedrate specified in a program.
As the result, the tool moves along the programmed path at a feedrate different from the specified
feedrate.
This function overrides the feedrate so that the feedrate along the programmed path will be equal to
the programmed feedrate only for internal arc cutting operation.
(Cutting feedrate along the programmed path) = (Programmed feedrate)

Cutting feedrate along the

programmed path
Programmed path

Feedrate
rc
specified in a
rp program

Tool path
(Center of the tool9

rc: Arc radius calculated by cutter

diameter compensation
rp: Programmed arc radius
LE32114R0100800010001

(1) Conditions
The conditions to turn on the override function for internal arc cutting are indicated below.

• In the cutter radius compensation mode

• Internal arc cutting operation

(2) Actual Feedrate (Feedrate on Cutter Center Path)

For internal arc cutting as shown in Fig. 3-1, actual feedrate on the cutter center path is calcu-
lated as shown below.
(Actual feedrate) = (Programmed feedrate) x rc/rp
 5262-E P-232
SECTION 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS

(3) Others
This function is valid in the following four kinds of interpolation planes.
If this function is specified while a plane other than those indicated below is selected, the func-
tion is invalid.

• G17 X-Y plane (coordinate conversion function is used)

• G119 C-X-Z plane

• G138 & G17 X-Y plane (Y-axis function is used)

• G138 & G19 Y-Z plane (Y-axis function is used)

(4) Lower Limit of Override

Even in internal arc cutting operation, there will be cases that do not require feedrate decelera-
tion or operations in which cutting time should not be elongated unnecessarily. For these
cases, set an appropriate value for the following parameter.
OPTIONAL PARAMETER MULTIPLE MACHINING
No. 9 Lower limit of override for inside arc
Setting range: 1 to 100 [%]
Initial value: 100 [%]
This sets the minimum value of the override to be applied to the programmed feedrate.
If “rc/rp 100 t Parameter setting” in Fig.3-1, actual feedrate is calculated using the following for-
mula.
Actual feedrate = Programmed feedrate Parameter setting
 5262-E P-233
SECTION 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS

1-2. Helical Cutting Function (Optional)

This function allows the machine to perform helical cutting on the planes selected with G17/G18/
G19.76

(1) Format
The command format for executing helical cutting in the G18 plane is explained below.
For helical cutting in the G17/G19 plane, refer to the Programming Manual.
In helical cutting in the G18 plane, linear interpolation of the Y-axis is synchronized with circular
interpolation in the Z-X plane.
Programming Format

G18 G94
G02 X_ Z_ I_ K_ Y_ F
(G03) (L_ )

LE32114R0100800020001

G18: Z-X plane selection command

G02/G03: CW/CCW circular interpolation command
X : End point of circle (XI-axis)
Z : End point of circle (ZI-axis)
I : Relative coordinate of the center of the circle in reference to the circle start point (XI-
axis)
K : Relative coordinate of the center of the circle in reference to the circle start point (ZI-
axis)
L : Radius of a circle (generates an arc with center angle of 180 or smaller)
Y : Movement stroke along the Y-axis during circular interpolation (during the X-/Z-axis
movements from the start to end point of the circle)
F : Feedrate for circular interpolation
Feedrate of an infeed axis (Y-axis in this case) can be calculated using the following formula.
[Infeed axis feedrate] = [Infeed axis movement distance] / [Arc length] [F command value]

(2) Cautions on programming helical cutting

• The helical cutting function can be specified in the Y-axis mode (G138).

• If the end point lies at the same point as the start point of the circle in the same plane, a full
circle is generated.

• Note that a full circle cannot be defined using an L command.

• If a full circle command is executed continuously using the helical cutting commands,
sequence joining processing is executed unconditionally. (Setting for optional parameter
(bit) No. 69, bit 0 is disregarded.)

• Helical cutting is also possible in the slant face coordinate system as in the standard coor-
dinate system.
 5262-E P-234
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

SECTION 7 APPENDIX

1. Logic Tables
• Input Logic Table

• Output Logic Table

• Manual Interlock Table

• Cam Shaft Input Logic Table

• Cam Shaft Output Logic Table

 5262-E P-235
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010001
 5262-E P-236
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010002
 5262-E P-237
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010003
 5262-E P-238
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010004
 MacTurn 250/350 1 2 3 4 5 6
ATC Logic Table 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01

Shutter open
T Tool clamp

Shutter close

RS Tool insert
T Tool existing
T Tool unclamp

RS Tool extract
RS Tool existing
INPUT LOGIC

MG Tool existing
T Tool not existing

EA Return position
RS Tool not existing
(1/2)

MG Tool not existing

EA rotation complete

T Tool change position 1

T Tool change position 2

RS Rotation MG position
RS Rotation tool change position

Shutter 2 open confirmation

Shutter 2 close confirmation

Operation Sequence No.

MG Manual intervention OFF
Operation Sequence No.

T ATC Position index complete

1 Waiting for command (MT) 1

2 Magazine indexing 2
3 RS Tool insertion 3
4 RS Tool change position 4
5 RS Tool extraction Shutter 2 close 5
6 Waiting for command (M06) 6
7 MG Start indexing tool return pot (turret) 7
8 Shutter open 8
9 Tool change 9
10 Shutter close 10
11 MG Indexing return pot (RS) 11
12 RS Tool insertion Shutter 2 open 12
13 RS Magazine position 13
14 RS Tool extraction 14

B-test data

Auto-branch data
6 Waiting for machining completion (Next tool return cycle)
14 RS Tool extraction
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010005
5262-E P-239
 MacTurn 250/350 7 8 9 A B C
ATC Logic Table 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01

INPUT LOGIC

M06 Tool change

Tool attribute agree
(2/2)

Step reverse interlock

M228 Next tool cancel

Step advance interlock

Operation Sequence No.

Tool change (Large-dai. Tool)
Operation Sequence No.

Magazine index position agree

M-tool spindle at orientation position

1 Waiting for command (MT) 1
2 Magazine indexing 2
3 RS Tool insertion 3
4 RS Tool change position 4
5 RS Tool extraction Shutter 2 close 5
6 Waiting for command (M06) 6
7 MG Start indexing tool return pot (turret) 7
8 Shutter open 8
9 Tool change 9
10 Shutter close 10
11 MG Indexing return pot (RS) 11
12 RS Tool insertion Shutter 2 open 12
13 RS Magazine position 13
14 RS Tool extraction 14

B-test data

Auto-branch data
6 Waiting for machining completion (Next tool return cycle)
14 RS extraction
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010006
5262-E P-240
 5262-E P-241
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010007
 5262-E P-242
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010008
 5262-E P-243
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010009
 5262-E P-244
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010010
 MacTurn 250/350 1 2 3 4 5 6
ATC Logic Table 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01

RS Tool insert

Shutter 2 open
Shutter 2 close
RS Tool extract
OUTPUT LOGIC (1/2)
Return cycle disabled
EA Speed adjustment

RS Rotation MG position

Operation Sequence No.

Operation Sequence No.

RS Rotation tool change position

1 Waiting for command (MT) 1
2 Magazine indexing 2
3 RS Tool insertion 3
4 RS Tool change position 4
5 RS Tool extraction Shutter 2 close 5
6 Waiting for command (M06) 6
7 MG Start indexing tool return pot (turret) 7
8 Shutter open 8
9 Tool change 9
10 Shutter close 10
11 MG Indexing return pot (RS) 11
12 RS Tool insertion Shutter 2 open 12
13 RS Magazine position 13
14 RS Tool extraction 14
SECTION 7 APPENDIX
5262-E P-245

LE32114R0100900010011
 5262-E P-246
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Operation Sequence No.

80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01
C
B

Same MT command valid

M06 commande receive enabled
X-axis movement disabled
Y-axis movement disabled
Z-axis movement disabled
A

Shutter open
Shutter close
M Pot stop at fixed position
ATC Start position
Step timer A
Step timer B
Auto-branch
NC answer back
9

Step reverse disabled

EA rotation command

Next tool index

Next tool write
Stored tool index (Turret side)
Stored tool index
8

MG Index eneabled
MG Tool extraction
MG Tool return
Next tool cancel
Manual Tool change
T Tool unclamp
ATC Air blow 2 Face
ATC Air blow 1
7

RS Air blow
MG Air blow
Magazine manual intervention enabled
M-tool spindle rotation disabled
(2/2)

MG Start indexing tool return pot (turret)

RS Tool extraction Shutter 2 close

RS Tool insertion Shutter 2 open

MG Indexing return pot (RS)
Waiting for command (M06)
OUTPUT LOGIC

Waiting for command (MT)

RS Tool change position

RS Magazine position
Magazine indexing

RS Tool extraction
RS Tool insertion
MacTurn 250/350

Shutter close
Shutter open
ATC Logic Table

Tool change

14
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Operation Sequence No.

LE32114R0100900010012
 5262-E P-247
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010013
 5262-E P-248
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010014
 5262-E P-249
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010015
 5262-E P-250
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010016
 MacTurn 250/350 1 2 3 4 5 6
ATC Logic Table 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01

Shutter open
T Tool clamp

Shutter close

RS Tool insert
T Tool existing
T Tool unclamp

RS Tool extract
RS Tool existing
MANUAL

MG Tool existing
T Tool not existing

EA Return position
RS Tool not existing
INTERLOCK (1/2)

MG Tool not existing

EA rotation complete

Step Return
Return Cycle
T Tool change position 1
T Tool change position 2

RS Rotation MG position

Shutter 2 open confirmation

Shutter 2 close confirmation

Operation Sequence No.

Operation Sequence No.

MG Manual intervention OFF

T ATC Position index complete

RS Rotation tool change position

1 Waiting for command (MT) 1
2 Magazine indexing 2
3 RS Tool insertion 3
4 RS Tool change position 4
5 RS Tool extraction Shutter 2 close 5
6 Waiting for command (M06) 6
7 MG Start indexing tool return pot (turret) 7
8 Shutter open 8
9 Tool change 9
10 Shutter close 10
11 MG Indexing return pot (RS) 11
12 RS Tool insertion Shutter 2 open 12
13 RS Magazine position 13
14 RS Tool extraction 14

Manual step branch

9 Tool change
14 RS Tool extraction

Manual step back

2 Magazine indexing
9 Tool change
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010017
5262-E P-251
 MacTurn 250/350 7 8 9 A B C
ATC Logic Table 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01

MANUAL

M06 Tool change

Tool attribute agree
INTERLOCK (2/2)

Step reverse interlock

M228 Next tool cancel

Step Return
Step advance interlock

Return Cycle

Operation Sequence No.

Operation Sequence No.

Tool change (Large-dai. Tool)

Magazine index position agree

M-tool spindle at orientation position

1 Waiting for command (MT) 1
2 Magazine indexing 2
3 RS Tool insertion 3
4 RS Tool change position 4
5 RS Tool extraction Shutter 2 close 5
6 Waiting for command (M06) 6
7 MG Start indexing tool return pot (turret) 7
8 Shutter open 8
9 Tool change 9
10 Shutter close 10
11 MG Indexing return pot (RS) 11
12 RS Tool insertion Shutter 2 open 12
13 RS Magazine position 13
14 RS Tool extraction 14

Manual step branch

9 Tool change
14 RS Tool extraction

Manual step back

2 Magazine indexing
9 Tool change
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

LE32114R0100900010018
5262-E P-252
 5262-E P-253
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

MacTurn 250/350 6 6
ATC Logic Table 02 01

EA Rotation

EA Insert/Extract

T-tool Unclamp

T-tool Clamp
Operation Sequence No.

CAM AXIS INPUT LOGIC

Cam Angle
9
0
Retracted
state
2
Tool
Tool gripping Waiting
inserted
operation for ON
state
60

Tool gripped
75
state
Tool
extracting
112.5
operation

140
Tool
180˚rotation extracting ON OFF
operation
220

Tool
247.5 inserting
operation

Tool gripped
285
state
Waiting
for ON
300
Tool
Retraction inserted
state
358 OFF ON
Retracted
state

LE32114R0100900010019
 5262-E P-254
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

MacTurn 250/350 7
ATC Logic Table 02

EA Rotation

EA Insert/Extract

T-tool Unclamp

RS Air Blow

ATC Air Blow 1

ATC Air Blow 2 (End Face)

Operation Sequence No.

CAM AXIS OUTPUT

LOGIC

Cam Angle
9
0
Retracted
state
2
Tool
Tool gripping
inserted ON
operation
state
60

Tool gripped
75
state
Tool
extracting
112.5 ON ON
operation
ON

140
Tool
180˚ rotation extracted
state
220

Tool
247.5 inserting OFF
operation

Tool gripped
285
state

300
Tool
Retraction inserted OFF OFF
state
358 OFF
Retracted
state

LE32114R0100900010020
 5262-E P-255
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

MacTurn550 2 2 6 6
ATC logic table 80 40 02 01

EA rotation

EA insert/extract

EA tool unlock

EA tool lock

T tool unclamp

T tool clamp
Operation sequence No.

CAM AXIS
INPUT LOGIC

Cam
15 Angle
0
↓ Retracted
2 state
↓
↓ Tool ON OFF
54 gripping Tool
↓
operation inserted
↓ Waiting
57 state for
signal
↓ Waiting
for ON
↓ signal ON

86 Tool OFF ON ON OFF

87 gripped
↓ state
↓ Tool
122 extracting
↓
operation
↓
147
↓ 180° Tool
ON OFF
↓ extracted
222 rotation state
↓
↓ Tool
242 inserting
↓
operation
↓
282 Tool
↓ Waiting Waiting
gripped for for
↓ signal ON signal ON

301 state ON OFF OFF ON

↓ Tool
303 inserted
↓
state
↓ Retraction ON OFF OFF ON
358
↓ Retracted
360 state
LE32114R0100900010021
 5262-E P-256
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

MacTurn550 5 7 B B 7 7 7
ATC logic table 01 02 02 01 10 08 04

EA rotation

EA insert/extract

EA tool unlock

T tool unclamp

T tool unclamp with low pressure

T Tool Clamp

RS air Blow

ATC air Blow 1

ATC air Blow 2 (End Face)

Operation sequence No.

CAM AXIS
OUTPUT LOGIC

Cam
15 Angle
0
↓ Retracted
state OFF OFF ON OFF
2
↓
↓ Tool ON
Tool ON
54 gripping
↓ inserted OFF OFF
operation
↓ state ON
57
↓
↓ Tool
87 gripped
↓ state
↓ Tool
122 extracting ON OFF
↓ operation
↓
147
OFF
↓ 180° Tool
↓ rotation
extracted ON
222 state OFF
ON
↓
↓ Tool
242 inserting OFF
↓ operation
↓ Tool
282 gripped
↓
state
↓
303 Tool
↓ inserted ON OFF ON OFF
↓ Retraction state
358 OFF
↓ Retracted
360 state

LE32114R0100900010022
 5262-E P-257
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

2. ATC Input/Output Bit Tables

INPUT

[Panel input] <Machine with Y-axis or ATC>

Signal name Address Label
Portable pulse handle effective (CE) I.008B ipHPHON
Portable pulse handle ineffective (operation panel effective; CE) I.008A ipHPHOF
Diagonal feed selection (MT) I.016A ipSLFED
Y-axis zero return I.0164 ipYZPR
Y-axis manual feed I.0163 ipMNPY
Y-axis manual feed I.0162 ipMNNY
Y-axis mode I.0160 ipYMOD
Y-axis selection for pulse handle I.0161 ipPHY
YB-axis manual +YB (HOB) I.0166 ipMNPYB
YB-axis manual -YB (HOB) I.0165 ipMNNYB
Orthogonal tool compensation 6/14add *1 I.0168 ipVTOF
ATC arm swing compensation I.0169 ipEAPS
W-axis clamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1 I.018C ipWCL
W-axis unclamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1 I.018D ipWUC
1st coolant 4 auto I.0047 ipCLAT4
1st coolant 4 manual I.0046 ipCLMN4
Request for manual loading/unloading I.020D ipMORQ
Turret index to ATC position I.020C ipTIDA
Turret index to cutting position I.020B ipTIDC
1-cycle start I.020A ipSGCY
Return cycle start I.0209 ipRECY
1-step feed I.0208 ipSTFF
1-step reverse I.0207 ipSTRE
Interlock release I.0206 ipAILOF
Bar feeder link OFF (CE) I.021A ipBFOFF
Bar feeder link ON I.0219 ipBFON
ATC shutter close I.0205 ipASHCL
ATC shutter open I.0204 ipASHOP
Turret manual tool change L/Face mill/L (MT) I.0203 ipTCFT
Turret manual tool change Side end mill/M tool (MT) I.0202 ipTCRT
Turret tool clamp PB I.0201 ipTTCL
Turret tool unclamp PB I.0200 ipTTUC

LE32114R0100900020001
 5262-E P-258
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

OUTPUT
[Panel output] <Machine with Y-axis or ATC>
Signal name Address Label

Diagonal feed selection (MT) 0.010D opSLFED

M-tool spindle unclamp (H1) 6/10add *1 0.0105 opMSPRE

Y-axis mode 0.0108 opYMOD
Y-axis selection for pulse handle 0.0109 opPHY
Not usable
Not usable
Orthogonal tool compensation 6/14add *1 0.010C opVTOF
Bar feeder link ON 0.0147 opBFON
W-axis clamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1 0.011D opWCL
W-axis unclamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1 0.011E opWUC
1st coolant 4 auto 0.0037 opCLAT4
1st coolant 4 manual 0.0036 opCLMN4
Request for manual loading/unloading 0.0137 opMORQ
Turret index to ATC position 0.0136 opTIDA
Turret index to cutting position 0.0135 opTIDC
1-cycle start 0.0134 opSGCY
Return cycle start 0.0133 opRECY
1-step feed 0.0132 opSTFF
1-step reverse 0.0131 opSTRE
Interlock release 0.0130 opAILOF
Not usable
Not usable

LE32114R0100900020002
 5262-E P-259
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

INPUT
[EC input] <Standard model>
Signal name Address Label
Emergency limit release/ I.1008 iEOF/
Operation power OFF/ I.100C iOPOF/
Travel end alarm/ I.1006 iSEA/
CPU (control cabinet) temperature alarm/ I.1004 iTMA/
Transformer overload alarm/ I.1003 iOHA/
EC overload alarm/ I.1001 iOLA/
EC circuit breaker alarm/ I.1000 iCBA/
Emergency stop/ I.100B iEMSTP/
1st headstock oil cooler level alarm/ I.1032 iOCL/
1st headstock oil cooler alarm/ I.1031 iOCA/

1st spindle low chuck pressure/ I.1030 iCPA/

Chip conveyor alarm/ I.1011 iCPAL/
ATC axis EC circuit breaker alarm/ I.138F iACBA/
Spindle lubricating oil low pressure/ I.1033 iSOA/
ATC axis motor overload alarm/ I.138E iAOLA/
Slideway lubricating oil flow I.1025 iBOF
Slideway lubricating oil level low I.1024 iBOL
External start impossible I.1045 iESUE
External alarm/ I.1044 iALM/
External cycle stop/ I.1043 iSSP/
External slide hold/ I.1042 iTSP/
External start I.1041 iSTR
Calendar timer input I.1060 iCTIM
External reset I.1040 iRST
1st spindle chuck interlock/ I.1155 iOIL/
1st C-axis interlock/ I.1126 iCIL/
Emergency stop monitor/ I.1009 iEMMON/
External command for 1st spindle CW in inching mode I.1151 iESIN
External command for 1st spindle CCW in inching mode I.1150 iINCC
M-tool spindle oil cooler level alarm/ I.1129 iMOCLAL/
M-tool spindle oil cooler alarm/ (H1) I.1128 iMOCAL/

LE32114R0100900020003
 5262-E P-260
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

OUTPUT
[EC output] <Standard model> Multi-port
Signal name Address Label
Chip conveyor ON O.1027 oCPCO
NC running O.100D oNCRUN
Axis power ON 1 O.1000 oPWON1
Axis operation ON 1 O.1004 oOPON1
Axis brake release 2 O.1009 oBKRLS2
Axis brake release 1 O.1008 oBKRLS1
Axis power ON 2 O.1001 oPWON2
Axis operation ON 2 O.1005 oOPON2
Work lamp O.1015 oRUNO
Alarm lamp O.1014 oALMO
Operation end lamp O.1013 oPSP
Running lamp O.1012 oNCSTO
NC unit power OFF O.100E oNCUOF
Auto power shutoff O.1029 oPWOF
1st safety door lock release (PL, CE) O.1200 oSDRPB
2nd safety door lock release (PL, CE) O.1210 o2SDRPB
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
(Not usable)
LE32114R0100900020004
 5262-E P-261
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

INPUT
[EC output] [EC output]
Signal name Address Label
MP2:
MP2:
MP2: 1st spindle chuck open confirmation PS I.154D iCECHOPP
MP2: 1st spindle chuck close confirmation PS I.154C iCECHCLP
MP2: 1st sensor arm advance position confirmation I.1251 iSHADC
MP2: 1st sensor arm retract position confirmation I.1250 iSHRTC
MP2:1st spindle chuck open confirmation I.1159 iCHOPC
MP2:1st spindle chuck close confirmation I.1158 iCHCLC
MP14: 1st ceiling door open confirmation I.1217 iUDOPC
MP14: 1st ceiling door close confirmation I.1218 iUDCLC
MP14:
MP14: 1st door open confirmation/ I.1212 iDROP/
MP14: Air source pressure confirmation/ I.102C iARW/
MP14: Low hydraulic oil pressure/ I.1020 iOPA/
MP14:
MP14: Hydraulic oil level low/ I.1021 iOPAL/

MP10: Tailstock clamp confirmation 2 I.1278 iTSCL2

MP10: Tailstock clamp confirmation 1 I.1277 iTSCL1
MP10: Connection ON, tailstock-saddle connect pin IN confirmation) I.127A iTSCPLMC
MP10: Connection OFF (tailstock-saddle connect pin OUT confirmation) I.1279 iTSCPRTC
MP10: Tailstock retract confirmation I.1275 iTSRTC
MP10: Tailstock sizing position confirmation I.1274 iTSLMC
MP10: tailstock over-advance confirmation I.1273 iTSOAC
2nd spindle low chuck pressure/ I.1038 i2CPA/
Door open/close safety rubber switch/ I.121F iDRSRB/
Sub hydraulic oil drain pump ON confirmation I.1071 iDPON
Sub hydraulic oil drain pump OFF confirmation I.1070 iDPOFF
2nd sensor arm advance position confirmation I.1259 i2SHADC
2nd sensor arm retract position confirmation I.1258 i2SHRTC
2nd spindle chuck open confirmation I.1169 i2CHOPC
2nd spindle chuck close confirmation I.1168 i2CHCLC
LE32114R0100900020005
 5262-E P-262
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model> Multi-port

Signal name Address Label

MP1: 1st C-axis brake pressure release O.1104 oCBKRL

MP1: 1st spindle chuck low pressure O.1139 oCHLP
MP1: 1st C-axis clamp O.1103 oCCP
MP1: 1st C-axis brake O.1102 oCBRK
MP1:1st spindle chuck open O.1134 oCHOPO
MP1:1st spindle chuck close O.1133 oCHCLO
Mp3:
MP3: ATC air blow 2 (tool) O.133D oATAB2
MP3: ATC air blow 1 (turret) O.133C oATAB1
MP3: 1st air blow B (MT thru) O.1171 oARB
MP4: Tool insertion by RS in standby position 1 O.1352 oRSPP1
(MT30) O.1353 oRSPP2
MP4: Tool extraction by RS in standby position 2 O.1351 oRSSP
(MT30) O.1350 oRSMGP
MP4: RS swing to tool change position O.133B o2ASHC
MP4: RS swing to MG position O.133A o2ASHO
MP5: ATC shutter close 2
MP5: ATC shutter open 2 O.1358 oRSAB
MP5: O.136A oATESOF
MP5: RS air blow O.1369 oATESON
MP5: ATC escape OFF O.1333 oASHC
MP5: ATC escape ON O.1332 oASHO
MP5: ATC shutter close O.1071 oBHP
MP5: ATC shutter open O.1070 oBLP
MP6: B-axis brake OFF (NC-B) O.1084 oBCL
MP6: B-axis low-pressure brake (NC-B) O.1081 oTUC
MP6: B-axis high-pressure brake OFF (MC-B) (H2) O.1365 oLTCLC
MP6: A-turret unclamp O.1364 oLTUCLC
MP6: Tool clamp (MT20) O.1109 oMUCL
MP6: Tool unclamp (MT20) O.1108 oMCL
LE32114R0100900020006
 5262-E P-263
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

INPUT

[EC input] <Standard model> Multi-port

Signal name Address Label
Tool clamp confirmation (MT30/50) I.1375 iLTCLC
Tool unclamp confirmation (MT30/50) I.1374 iLTUCLC
M-tool spindle unclamp confirmation 6 (H1) I.112F iMUCLC6
M-tool spindle unclamp confirmation 5 (H1) I.112E iMUCLC5
M-tool spindle unclamp confirmation 4 (H1) I.112D iMUCLC4
M-tool spindle unclamp confirmation 3 (H1) I.112C iMUCLC3
M-tool spindle unclamp confirmation 2 (H1) I.112B iMUCLC2
M-tool spindle unclamp confirmation 1 (H1) I.112A iMUCLC1
MG operation disabled I.1389 iMGPH
MG manual interrupt ON I.138A iMGIN
MG manual interrupt OFF I.138B iMGOF

Turret oil mist lube drop sensor (MT30/50) I.1067 iTOLDS

Turret oil mist lube pressure alarm/ (MT30/50) I.1066 iTOLPAL/
Turret oil mist lube level alarm (MT30/50) I.1065 iTOLLAL/

MP11: Tool insertion by RS in standby position 1 (MT30) I.1365 iRSPP1

MP11: Tool extraction by RS in standby position 2 (MT30) I.1366 iRSPP2
MP11: RS swing to tool change position confirmation I.1362 iRSSP
MP11: RS swing to MG position confirmation I.1361 iRSMGP
MP11: RS tool exists I.1360 iRSTO
MP11:ATC MG no-tool confirmation I.137A iMGTO
MP11: ATC shutter close confirmation 2 I.1391 i2ASHC
MP11: ATC shutter open confirmation 2 I.1390 i2ASHO
M108 answer I.1307 iUSM8A
M107 answer I.1306 iUSM7A
M106 answer I.1305 iUSM6A
M105 answer I.1304 iUSM5A
M104 answer I.1303 iUSM4A
M103 answer I.1302 iUSM3A
M102 answer I.1301 iUSM2A
M101 answer I.1300 iUSM1A
LE32114R0100900020007
 5262-E P-264
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model> Multi-port

Signal name Address Label

MP7: Tailstock quill low pressure O.1252 oTSLP

MP7: Tailstock unclamp O.1255 oTSUC
MP7: Tailstock quill retract O.1251 oTSRTO
MP7: Tailstock quill advance O.1250 oTSADO

MP9: 2nd C-axis brake depressurization O.1114 o2CBKRL

MP9: 2nd spindle chuck low pressure O.1149 o2CHLP
MP9: 2nd C-axis clamp O.1113 o2CCP
MP9: 2nd C-axis brake O.1112 o2CBRK
MP9: 2nd spindle chuck open O.1144 o2CHOPO
MP9: 2nd spindle chuck close O.1143 o2CHCLO
B-turret B unclamp O.1089 o2TUC
T-axis brake release O.108F oTABR

Turret oil mist lube pump drive air ON (MT30/50) O.1060 oTOLPAR

Turret oil mist lubrication air ON (MT30/50) O.1061 oTOLAR

MG manual interruption ON O.1339 oMGMI

MG door lock output (MT30/50) O.1366 oMGDLC

M108 O.1287 oUSM8

M107 O.1286 oUSM7
M106 O.1285 oUSM6
M105 O.1284 oUSM5
M104 O.1283 oUSM4
M103 O.1282 oUSM3
M102 O.1281 oUSM2
M101 O.1280 oUSM1

LE32114R0100900020008
 5262-E P-265
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

INPUT

[EC input] <Standard model>

Signal name Address Label
2nd spindle chuck pedal 2 I.1167 i2CHP2
2nd spindle chuck pedal 1 I.1166 i2CHP1
Thru spindle filter clogged I.1075 iTHSFC
Tailstock retraction pedal I.1272 iTSRF
Tailstock advance pedal 2 (hold) I.1271 iTSA2
Tailstock advance pedal 1 (inching) I.1270 iTSA1
1st spindle chuck pedal 2 I.1157 iCHP2
1st spindle chuck pedal 1 I.1156 iCHP1
2nd spindle oil cooler level alarm/ I.103A i2OCL/
2nd spindle oil cooler alarm/ I.1039 i2OCA/

MG door 1 close confirmation I.1383 iMG1CL

MG door 1 lock confirmation I.1382 iMG1LK
1st door close confirmation/ I.1214 iDRCL/
1st door close confirmation I.1210 iDRCL
2nd C-axis interlock/ I.1127 i2CIL/
B-axis high-pressure brake release confirmation PS I.109A iBULC
B-axis clamp confirmation LS I.109B iBCLC
No-tool confirmation I.1377 iLTN
MP12:

MP12: ATC shutter close confirmation I.1387 iASHC

MP12:ATC shutter open confirmation I.1386 iASHO
A-turret unclamp confirmation I.1091 iTUCA
A-turret clamp confirmation I.1090 iTCLA
B-turret unclamp confirmation I.1093 i2TUC
B-turret clamp confirmation I.1092 i2TCL
MP8:
MP8: Tailstock advance confirmation PS I.1549 iCETSADP
MP8: 2nd spindle chuck open confirmation PS I.154F iCE2CHOPP
MP8: 2nd spindle chuck close confirmation PS I.154E iCE2CHCLP

LE32114R0100900020009
 5262-E P-266
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model>

Signal name Address Label
Sub hydraulic oil drain pump ON motor O.1023 oDPMT
M-tool spindle oil cooler ON (H1) O.110A oMOCON
Suction pump O.1192 oCLPU
2nd coolant 1 (lower turret) O.1188 o2CLI
Chip flusher pump O.1194 oCPCLPU
Upper turret coolant pump O.1184 oCLMT
Slideway lubricating oil motor O.1022 oBOMT
Hydraulic motor ON O.1020 oHYMON
1st ceiling door open O.1206 oUDOP
1st ceiling door close O.1207 oUDCL

1st air blow E O.1174 oARE

Work count O.1039 oWKC
Hourmeter 3 O.1032 oINM3
Hourmeter 2 O.1031 oINM2
Hourmeter 1 O.1030 oINM1
MP13: Air source pressure ON O.1024 oARMPO
MP13: 1st spindle chucking error detection air O.112E oCMAO
MP13:1st sensor arm advance O.1231 oSHAD
MP13:1st sensor arm retract O.1230 oSHRT
MP13:2nd air blow A O.1178 o2ARA
MP13:1st air blow A O.1170 oARA
MP13:1st door open O.1203 oDROP
MP13: 1st door close O.1202 oDRCL

1st coolant 1 (M-tool coolant) O.1191 oACLMTL

1st coolant 1 (thru/L) O.1180 oACL1

1st air blow D (touch setter/sensor air blow) O.1173 oARD

1st air blow C (touch setter/sensor air blow) O.1172 oARC
LE32114R0100900020010
 5262-E P-267
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

INPUT

[EC input] <Options> <Standard model>

Signal name Address Label
1st spindle orientation pin OUT confirmation I.1154 iSOPO
1st spindle orientation pin IN confirmation I.1153 iSCSF
External command for 1st spindle orientation I.1152 iEXOR
CEJ transfer start I.1480 iTRST
Sequencer alarm/ I.1010 iSQAL/

MP21: Parts catcher slide retract confirmation I.128B iPCSBA

MP21: Parts catcher slide advance confirmation I.128A iPCSFR
MP21: Parts catcher retract confirmation I.1289 iPCBA
MP21: Parts catcher advance confirmation I.1288 iPCFR
External command for 1st air blow E I.1204 iEARE
External command for 1st air blow D (touch setter) I.1203 iEARD
External command for 1st air blow C (touch sensor) I.1202 iEARC
External command for 1st air blow B I.1201 iEARB
External command for tailstock quill advance I.127D iETSAD
External command for tailstock quill retract I.127C iETSRT
External command for 1st door open I.1216 iEDROP
External command for 1st door close I.1215 iEDRCL
B-turret LS 8 I.110F iTLB8
B-turret LS 7 I.110E iTLB7
B-turret LS 6 I.110D iTLB6
B-turret LS 5 I.110C iTLB5
B-turret LS 4 I.110B iTLB4
B-turret LS 3 I.110A iTLB3
B-turret LS 2 I.1109 iTLB2
B-turret LS 1 I.1108 iTLB1
LE32114R0100900020011
 5262-E P-268
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model>

Signal name Address Label
1st spindle orientation pin IN/brake ON O.1132 oSSPP
1st spindle orientation being executed O.1131 oSCSP
1st spindle being stopped O.1130 oSPSP

MP21: Parts catcher slide retract O.1261 oPCSBA

MP21: Parts catcher slide advance O.1260 oPCSFR
MP21: Parts catcher retract O.1263 oPCBAB
MP21: Parts catcher advance O.1262 oPCFRB

Tailstock quill sizing confirmation output O.1254 oTADO

Tailstock quill retract confirmation output O.1253 oTRTO
1st door open confirmation output O.1205 oDROPC
1st door close confirmation output O.1204 oDRCLC

1st spindle chuck unclamp confirmation output O.1138 oCHOPC

1st spindle chuck clamp confirmation output O.1137 oCHCLC
B-turret CCW O.108B o2TCC
B-turret CW O.108A o2TCW
LE32114R0100900020012
 5262-E P-269
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

INPUT

[EC input] <Machine with ATC> <MacTurn type>

Signal name Address Label

TOOL-ID retract confirmation I.137F iTIDRT

TOOL-ID advance confirmation I.137E iTIDAD
Sub arm clamp (MT30) I.1347 iSACL
Sub arm standby position confirmation I.1344 iSAWP
Sub arm magazine position confirmation I.1343 iSAMGP
Sub arm ready station position confirmation I.1342 iSARSP
Sub arm tool insertion confirmation I.1341 iSAIN
Sub arm tool extraction confirmation I.1340 iSAOU

M-tool clamp confirmation (MT30/50) I.1373 iMTCLC

M-tool unclamp confirmation (MT30/50) I.1372 iMTUCLC

MTC magazine tool clamp (MT50) I.1379 iMTCCL

MTC magazine tool unclamp (FT SW) (MT50) I.1378 iMTCUCL

No M-tool I.1376 iMTN

LE32114R0100900020013
 5262-E P-270
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Machine with ATC> <MacTurn type>

Signal name Address Label

TOOL-ID retract O.133F oTIDRT

TOOL-ID advance O.133E oTIDAD
Sub arm unclamp (MT30) O.134B oSAUCL
Sub arm clamp (MT30) O.134A oSACL
Sub arm travel A O.1342 oSAMA
Sub arm travel B O.1343 oSAMB
Sub arm travel C O.1344 oSAMC
Sub arm travel D O.1345 oSAMD
Sub arm insertion O.1341 oSAIN
Sub arm extraction O.1340 oSAOU

M-tool clamp (MT50) O.1363 oMTCLC

M-tool projection (MT50) O.1362 oMTUCLC

MTC magazine tool unclamp (MT50) O.1368 oMTCUCL

LE32114R0100900020014
 5262-E P-271
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

3. List of Data Formats

3-1. Tool data setting (T)

ID Data
Data Kind G13/G14 Content of Data Remarks
Code No.
Tool offset T1 1-32 G13/G14 X(X-axis)
(64) G13/G14 Z(Z-axis)
(64) G13 Y(YI-axis)
Load monitor T12 1-64 G13/G14 X(X-axis)
reference G13/G14 Z(Z-axis)
value G13/G14 C (C-axis)
G13/G14 S (Spindle No. 1)
G13/G14 M (M-axis)
G13/G14 W (W-axis)
G13/G14 B (Spindle No. 2)
G13 Y (YI-axis)
Load monitor T13 1-64 G13/G14 X(X-axis)
first limit G13/G14 Z (Z-axis)
value G13/G14 C (C-axis)
G13/G14 S (Spindle No. 1)
G13/G14 M (M-axis)
G13/G14 W (W-axis)
G13/G14 B (Spindle No. 2)
G13 Y (YI-axis)
Load monitor T14 1-64 G13/G14 X (X-axis)
second limit G13/G14 Z (Z-axis)
value G13/G14 C(C-axis)
G13/G14 S(Spindle No. 1)
G13/G14 M(M-axis)
G13/G14 W(W-axis)
G13/G14 B(Spindle No. 2)
G13 Y(YI-axis)
 5262-E P-272
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

3-2. Zero point data setting (0)

ID Data
Data Kind G13/G14 Content of Data Remarks
Code No.
Zero point 01 1-2 G13/G14 X(X-axis) N1:Zero offset
Z(Z-axis) N2:Zero shift
C(C-axis)
W(W-axis)
S(YS-axis)
Y(YI-axis)
Ball screw 02 1 G13/G14 X(X-axis)
pitch G13/G14 Z(Z-axis)
G13 S(YS-axis)
Pitch error 03 1-120 G13/G14 X(X-axis)
compensa- G13/G14 Z (Z-axis)
tion G13/G14 C (C-axis)
G13 S (YS-axis)
Zero point of 04 1-2 G13/G14 X (X-axis) N1:Zero offset
spindle No.2 G13/G14 Z (Z-axis) N2:Zero shift
G13/G14 C(C-axis)
G13 S (YS-axis)
G13 Y(YI-axis)
 5262-E P-273
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

3-3. Parameter setting (P)

ID Data
Data Kind G13/G14 Content of Data Remarks
Code No.
User param- P1 1-9 G13/G14 X(X-axis) N1:Positive variable limit (P)
eter G13/G14 Z(Z-axis) N2:Negative variable limit
G13/G14 C(C-axis) (P)
G13/G14 W(W-axis) N3:Positive variable limit
G13 S(YS-axis) (M)
G13 Y(YI-axis) N4:Negative variable limit
(M)
N9:Droop data
System P3 1-23 G13/G14 X(X-axis) N1:Positive stroke end limit
parameter G13/G14 Z(Z-axis) N2:Negative stroke end limit
G13/G14 C(C-axis) N3:Backlash
G13/G14 W(W-axis) N4:Encoder connection off-
G13 S(YS-axis) set
G13 Y(YI-axis) N5:Positive sensor position
G13/G14 I(Rapid feedrate) (P)
G13/G14 J(Manual fee- N6:Negative sensor posi-
G13/G14 drate) tion (P)
G13/G14 K(Slowdown time) N7:Positive sensor position
G13/G14 L(Encoder offset) (M)
G13/G14 M(Backlash) N8:Negative sensor posi-
G13/G14 N(In-position) tion (M)
O(Unclamp timer) N9:Reference ring position
N10:ATC tool change posi-
tion
N11:Encoder offset
N12:Rapid feedrate unit
amount
N13:Rapid feedrate accel-
eration unit amount
N14:Manual feedrate unit
amount
N15:Manual feed accelera-
tion unit amount
N16:Machine zero offset
N17:Torque set value
N18: Positive stroke offset
amount
N19:Negative stroke offset
amount
N20:ATC tool change posi-
tion A
N21:ATC tool change posi-
tion B
N22:ATC tool change posi-
tion C
N23:NC turret control
parameter
Data from I to 0 are set only
at N23
 5262-E P-274
SECTION 7 APPENDIX

ID Data
Data Kind G13/G14 Content of Data Remarks
Code No.
Turret posi- P4 1-12 G13/G14 X(X-axis)
tion (20) G13/G14 Z (Z-axis)
G13 Y(YI-axis)
Home posi- P14 1-8 G13/G14 X (X-axis)
tion G13/G14 Z (Z-axis)
G13 Y(YS-axis)
User param- P16 1-9 G13/G14 X (X-axis) N1:Positive variable limit (P)
eter G13/G14 Z (Z-axis) N2:Negative variable limit
for spindle G13/G14 C(C-axis) (P)
No.2 G13/G14 W(W-axis) N3:Positive variable limit
G13 S(YS-axis) (M)
G13 Y(Yl-axis) N4:Negative variable limit
(M)
N9:Droop data
Y-axis con- P24 1-8 G13 X (Xl-axis) N1:Rapid feedrate unit
trol parame- G13 Z (Zl-axis) amount
ter G13 Y(Yl-axis) N2:Rapid feedrate acceler-
G13 R(Data) ation unit amount
N3:Manual feedrate unit
amount
N4:Manual feedrate accel-
eration unit amount
N5:Torque set value
N6:YS-X angle data
N7:YS-axis spindle center
position
 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Publication No. Date Edition

5262-E January 2006 1st

This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or
design changes.
Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.
If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual, please
contact your OKUMA representative.